Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Nastran 2002
Thermal Analysis
User’s Guide
Main Index
Corporate
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
Fax: (714) 784-4056
Europe
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjyku-Ku, Tokyo 160-0023, Japan
Telephone: (81) (03) 6911 1200
Fax: (81) (03) 6911 1201
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Disclaimer
This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance
with the terms of such license.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this
document without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not
intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software Corporation
assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of
any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright 2004 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is
prohibited.
The software described herein may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from
MSC.Software suppliers.
MSC, MSC/, MSC., MSC.Dytran, MSC.Fatigue, MSC.Marc, MSC.Patran, MSC.Patran Analysis Manager, MSC.Patran
CATXPRES, MSC.Patran FEA, MSC.Patran Laminate Modeler, MSC.Patran Materials, MSC.Patran Thermal, MSC.Patran
Queue Manager and PATRAN are trademarks or registered trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group.
SAMCEF is a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of
Livermore Software Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned
subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ABAQUS is a registered trademark of ABAQUS Inc. ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial
Technology, Inc. CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA. EUCLID is a registered trademark of Matra
Datavision Corporation. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc. HPGL is a trademark of
Hewlett Packard. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. PTC, CADDS and Pro/ENGINEER are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or
other countries.Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation or
its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong
to their respective owners.
Main Index
C O N T E N T S
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis
User’s Guide
1
Introduction ■ Introduction to the MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide, 2
2
Thermal ■ Introduction to Thermal Capabilities, 6
Capabilities
■ Elements, 7
■ Material Properties, 10
■ Thermal Loads, 12
■ Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions, 16
■ Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints, 28
■ Initial Conditions, 30
3
Interface and File ■ Introduction to Interface and File Communication, 32
Communication
■ Execution of MSC.Nastran, 33
■ Input Data, 34
■ Files Generated by MSC.Nastran, 39
■ Plotting, 41
4
Method of Solution ■ Introduction to Solution Methods, 58
■ Nonlinear Iteration Scheme, 59
■ Steady State Analysis, 61
Main Index
■ Transient Analysis, 69
5
Examples ■ Steady State and Transient Analysis Examples, 83
■ Example 1a - Linear Conduction, 84
■ Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships, 88
■ Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient, 95
■ Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection, 100
■ Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition, 105
■ Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection, 111
■ Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes, 116
■ Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes, 122
■ Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary Conditions, 127
■ Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with
Radiation Boundary Condition, 130
■ Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with
Radiation Boundary Condition, 133
■ Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load, Spectral
Surface Behavior, 138
■ Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing, 142
■ Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an Ambient Element
Specification, 148
■ Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation, 153
■ Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow, 158
■ Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection Boundary, 163
■ Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature, 166
■ Example 7c - Time Varying Loads, 172
■ Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient, 176
■ Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer
Coefficient, 181
■ Example 7f - Phase Change, 185
■ Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses, 193
■ Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles, 200
■ Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles, 204
■ Example 10 - Thermostat Control, 210
■ Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection, 214
■ Example 12 - Thermostat Control with Deadband Applied to a Heat Source, 221
■ Example 13 - Cryogenic Heat Shielding, 223
Main Index
A
Nomenclature for ■ Commonly Used Terms, 228
Thermal Analysis
B
Executive Control ■ Frequently Used Executive Control Statements, 230
Section
C
Case Control ■ Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands, 244
Commands
D
Bulk Data Entries ■ Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries, 276
E
View Factor ■ Calculation of View Factors, 410
Calculation ■ Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation, 411
Methods
F
Radiation ■ Method of Poljak, 420
Enclosures
■ Method of Poljak - Radiation Exchange in Matrix Format, 422
■ Transformation from Element Heat Flows to Grid Point Heat Flows, 423
■ Example of Element/Grid Transformation, 424
■ Two Element Example for Radiant Exchange, 426
■ Resistive Network Approach to the Two Surface Problem, 428
■ Radiation Enclosure Analysis, 429
G
Radiation ■ Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange, 434
Exchange – Real
Surface
Approximation
Main Index
Main Index
Preface
Main Index
vi
Reference Books
❏ Quick Reference Guide
❏ DMAP Programmer’s Guide
❏ Reference Manual
User’s Guides
❏ Getting Started
❏ Linear Static Analysis
❏ Basic Dynamic Analysis
❏ Advanced Dynamic Analysis
❏ Design Sensitivity and Optimization
❏ Thermal Analysis
❏ Numerical Methods
❏ Aeroelastic Analysis
❏ Superelement
❏ User Modifiable
❏ Toolkit
Main Index
Preface vii
Technical Support
For help with installing or using an MSC.Software product, contact your local technical support
services. Our technical support provides the following services:
Web Go to the MSC.Software website at www.mscsoftware.com, and click on Support. Here, you can
find a wide variety of support resources including application examples, technical application
notes, available training courses, and documentation updates at the MSC.Software Training,
Technical Support, and Documentation web page.
Madrid, Spain
Telephone: (34) (91) 5560919
Fax: (34) (91) 5567280
Main Index
viii
Email Send a detailed description of the problem to the email address below that corresponds to the
product you are using. You should receive an acknowledgement that your message was
received, followed by an email from one of our Technical Support Engineers.
Training
The MSC Institute of Technology is the world's largest global supplier of
CAD/CAM/CAE/PDM training products and services for the product design, analysis and
manufacturing market. We offer over 100 courses through a global network of education
centers. The Institute is uniquely positioned to optimize your investment in design and
simulation software tools.
Our industry experienced expert staff is available to customize our course offerings to meet your
unique training requirements. For the most effective training, The Institute also offers many of
our courses at our customer's facilities.
The MSC Institute of Technology is located at:
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Phone: (800) 732-7211
Fax: (714) 784-4028
The Institute maintains state-of-the-art classroom facilities and individual computer graphics
laboratories at training centers throughout the world. All of our courses emphasize hands-on
computer laboratory work to facility skills development.
We specialize in customized training based on our evaluation of your design and simulation
processes, which yields courses that are geared to your business.
In addition to traditional instructor-led classes, we also offer video and DVD courses, interactive
multimedia training, web-based training, and a specialized instructor's program.
Main Index
Preface ix
Main Index
x
Internet Resources
MSC.Software (www.mscsoftware.com)
MSC.Software corporate site with information on the latest events, products and services for the
CAD/CAE/CAM marketplace.
Simulation Center (simulate.engineering-e.com)
Simulate Online. The Simulation Center provides all your simulation, FEA, and other
engineering tools over the Internet.
Engineering-e.com (www.engineering-e.com)
Engineering-e.com is the first virtual marketplace where clients can find engineering expertise,
and engineers can find the goods and services they need to do their job
CATIASOURCE (plm.mscsoftware.com)
Your SOURCE for Total Product Lifecycle Management Solutions.
Main Index
Preface xi
Main Index
xii
Name:_____________________________________________________________
Title: ______________________________________________________________
Company: _________________________________________________________
Address:___________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Telephone:_________________Email: __________________________________
Signature:______________________________ Date: ______________________
Name:_____________________________________________________________
Title: ______________________________________________________________
Signature:______________________________ Date: ______________________
Main Index
CHAPTER xiii
Preface
Fold here
_______________________
Place
_______________________
Stamp
_______________________ Here
MSC.Software Corporation
Attention: Legal Department
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Fold here
Main Index
xiv
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Introduction
1
■ Introduction to the MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Main Index
2
General Capabilities
• Solution methods:
• Steady state, linear and/or nonlinear (SOL 153).
• Transient, linear and/or nonlinear (SOL 159).
• Heat conduction:
• Temperature-dependent conductivity.
• Temperature-dependent specific heat.
• Anisotropic thermal conductivity.
• Latent heat of phase change.
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Thermal Capabilities
2
■ Introduction to Thermal Capabilities
■ Elements
■ Material Properties
■ Thermal Loads
■ Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions
■ Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints
■ Initial Conditions
Main Index
6
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 7
Thermal Capabilities
2.2 Elements
MSC.Nastran is an analysis code based on the finite element method. Fundamental to the
method is an element library, available for building discretized numerical models that
approximate the structure or system of interest. Several categories of elements exist to facilitate
model generation: conduction elements, surface elements, and specialty elements.
Conduction Elements
Conduction elements are defined by the configuration generated when geometric grid points are
connected in specific orientations and, for heat transfer, obey Fourier’s Law. These elements can
be characterized geometrically as being either one, two, or three dimensional, or axisymmetric.
Besides being associated with geometry, these elements have the material properties for thermal
conductivity, density, and specific heat associated with them. A typical element definition Bulk
Data entry is given below for a 2-D element:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 THETA ZOFFS
or MCID
T1 T2 T3 T4
Surface Elements
Wherever a boundary condition is applied to the surface of a conduction element, it must be
interfaced with a surface element. Surface elements provide the geometric connection between
the structural conduction elements and the applied convection, radiation, or heat flux loads. In
particular, surfaces that participate in radiation enclosures derive their cavity identity and their
radiation material property pointers from the surface element Bulk Data description. Similarly,
free- and forced-convection Bulk Data entries are identified through their mating surface
element identification numbers.
Main Index
8
Surface element geometries are associated with surface types. Of the three forms of surface
elements, the CHBDYG and the CHBDYP have their TYPE explicitly defined on their Bulk Data
entries. The CHBDYE deals with the geometry type implicitly by reference to the underlying
conduction element. The surface element Bulk Data entries are given below:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
Special Elements
Several types of special elements are available for added modeling flexibility. Simple resistive
components are represented by CELASi (i = 1, 2, 3, 4) elements. More complicated elements can
be introduced into the system through generalized matrix input in the form of DMI, DMIG, and
TF.
Lumped thermal capacitance can be defined with the use of CDAMPi (i = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) entries.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 9
Thermal Capabilities
• Element definitions reference Bulk Data property entries that supply supplemental
information about geometry and governing relationships, and subsequently refer to
material property entries.
Main Index
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAT4 MID K CP r H m HGEN REFENTH
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 11
Thermal Capabilities
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2 EMIS3 EMIS4 EMIS5 EMIS6
EMIS7 -etc.-
The following table describes the fields for the RADM Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
12
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 13
Thermal Capabilities
Case Conrol
DLOAD = SID
“LOAD” SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3
DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2
TABLED1 TID
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4
• Unlike the steady state case where many loads may utilize the same SID, every
TLOADi entry must have a unique SID. To apply multiple loads in a transient analysis,
the multiple TLOADi first must be combined using a DLOAD Bulk Data entry. The SID
on the DLOAD Bulk Data entry then becomes the reference SID on the DLOAD Case
Control command.
• Nonlinear transient forcing functions (NOLINi) are requested in Case Control with the
NONLINEAR = SID command. They are only available for transient analysis and
cannot be referenced on the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
14
A complete description of the capability of each load type may be found in the appropriate Bulk
Data entry description.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 15
Thermal Capabilities
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
EMIS7 -etc.-
T(A) T( ε 1) T( ε 2) T( ε 3) T( ε 4) T( ε 5) T( ε 6)
RADMT RADMID
T( ε 7) -etc.-
TABLEM2 TIDA X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
DT DELAY TAUC
Main Index
16
exp f exp f
• q = H ⋅ u CNTRLND ( T – TAMB )
where
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 17
Thermal Capabilities
• Free convection heat transfer coefficients are supplied on MAT4 Bulk Data entries. The
coefficient can be made temperature dependent by using the MATT4 entry.
• The access temperature for the temperature-dependent coefficient can be varied by
specifying the film node field (FLMND on CONV).
• Time dependence can be introduced into the heat transfer coefficient through the
control node entry (CNTRLND on CONV).
The following schematic illustrates the Bulk Data relationships for temperature- dependent-free
convection and time-dependent-free convection.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 Q ZOFFS
TABLEM2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
CHBDYE Provides the surface element for convection application through reference to
the underlying conduction element (CQUAD4).
CONV Stipulates the application of free convection and identifies the film node,
control node, and ambient node or nodes.
Main Index
18
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 19
Thermal Capabilities
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB
ρ µ
MAT4 MID K CP H HGEN REFENTH
Case Control
DLOAD = SID
DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2
TABLED2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
transfer between the fluid stream and the surroundings is accounted for through a forced
convection heat transfer coefficient based on locally computed Reynolds and Prandtl numbers.
The pertinent heat transfer behavior is listed as follows:
1. Streamwise energy transport due to advection plus streamwise diffusion
a. FLAG = 0 , no convective flow
b. FLAG = 1 , diffusion and convection transport
2. Heat transfer coefficient to fluid tube wall
hK
b. If FORM = 1, then ------- ( = coef ⋅ Re EXPR ⋅ Pr EXPP )
d
where
DVρ
Re = ------------
µ
Cp µ
Pr = ----------
k
∆t
CN ≡ V ⋅ -----
L
where:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 21
Thermal Capabilities
V = Velocity of fluid
∆t = Time step size
L = Element length
For good resolution of transient flow fields, it is recommended that CN ≤ .10. Since the
element length and mass flow rate are specified, this implies that the user must control
the time step size. This may eliminate the use of the automatic time step selection
scheme.
Radiation to Space
A radiation boundary condition can be specified with a RADBC Bulk Data entry. This form of
radiant exchange is solely between the surface element and a blackbody space node. The
following relationships apply:
1. If CNTRLND = 0, = ( σ ⋅ FAMB ) ⋅ ( ε e T e4 – α e T amb
4 )
Main Index
22
• Time dependence can be introduced into the RADBC in two ways. The Control Node
Multiplier (CNTRLND) can be made to follow a specified time function, and the
temperature of the ambient node (NODAMB) can be a function of time. Each has a
unique effect on the overall heat transfer.
• RADBC is the only Bulk Data entry besides QVECT that uses the material’s
absorptivity property in its calculations. For all enclosure radiation calculations,
absorptivity is assumed to be equal to emissivity.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 23
Thermal Capabilities
Main Index
24
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
TABLEM2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
RADSET Selects the radiation cavities to be included in the overall thermal analysis.
RADLST Specifies which elements are to participate in a cavity experiencing radiation
exchange.
RADMTX Provides the F ij = A j f ji exchange factors for all the surface elements of a
radiation enclosure specified in the corresponding RADLST.
CHBDYG Identifies the radiation surface geometry and material.
RADM Provides the surface properties for absorptivitiy and emissivity.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 25
Thermal Capabilities
RADMT Provides the identification for any surface material properties that are
temperature dependent.
TABLEMi Defines a tabular function for use in generating temperature-dependent
material properties.
RADBND Provides Planck’s second constant and the wavelength break points used for
spectral radiation exchange analysis. There can only be one RADBND
statement in a given analysis, regardless of the number of cavitities. While this
forces every exchange surface to have identical waveband break points, there
may be different RADM/RADMT for potentially every surface.
3. Calculation process - Radiant enclosure exchange where the view factors must be
calculated
a. All conduction element surfaces involved in a radiation enclosure must be
identified with surface elements (CHBDYi). The CHBDYi description of the surface
element identifies the surface material entry (RADM) as well as the cavity
identification (VIEW). Multiple cavities may be defined within MSC.Nastran for
flexible modeling, user convenience, and eliminating shadowing calculations in
determining view factors when groups of elements see only themselves to the
exclusion of other groups of elements.
b. Since no RADLST/RADMTX exists for this problem, they will be calculated. The
calculation of view factors is instigated by including the VIEW Bulk Data entry
which is referenced from the CHBDYi entries. VIEW lumps together those surface
elements of a common cavity identification and provides some guidance regarding
how the elements interact relative to any required shadowing calculations.
c. Only one RADCAV Bulk Data entry exists for each cavity. This entry has an array
of information available on it that is used to control the global aspects of the view
factor calculation for the cavity in question.
d. If the finite difference view factor module (default which may be described as an
area subdivision method) is to be used for the view factor calculation, the entries
discussed thus far are adequate for this part of the calculation. The minimum subset
of Bulk Data entries for this method of view factor calculation is:
For view factor calculation, use
CHBDYi
VIEW
RADCAV
To complete the thermal analysis, use
RADSET
RADM / RADMT / RADBND
In addition, include the parameters TABS and SIGMA.
Main Index
26
e. If the Gaussian integration view factor calculation (the adaptive method) is desired,
the VIEW3D Bulk Data entry must be included. It too is associated with a cavity ID,
and includes fields which provide calculation control limits. The minimum subset
of Bulk Data entries for this method of view factor calculation is:
For view factor calculation, use
CHBDYi
VIEW
VIEW3D
RADCAV
To complete the thermal analysis, use
RADSET
RADM / RADMT / RADBND
In addition, include the parameters TABS and SIGMA.
“View Factor Calculation Methods” on page 409 describes the calculation of view
factors in added detail.
The schematic below illustrates the Bulk Data interrelationship involved in the
determination of view factors and depicts the additional entries required to complete
the thermal analysis.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
RADCAV Identifies the characteristics of each radiation cavity and provides control
information for using the finite difference method when determining view
factors (VIEW module).
VIEW3D Provides the control quantities involved in using the Gaussian integration
adaptive view factor module (VIEW3D module).
See CHBDYG
EMIS7
ICAVITY
Main Index
28
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 29
Thermal Capabilities
CELASi These 1-D elements provide a convenient resistive network element that can be
used for thermal system modeling as well as for driving temperature boundary
conditions. They may automatically have one end set to a zero or grounded
value. A heat load (QHBDY) applied at the free end can be constant or time
varying. The load and matrix conductance values can be adjusted to minimize
the influence over the iterative convergence criteria.
MPC Otherwise known as a multipoint constraint. This constraint can be used to
specify a grid point temperature to be a weighted combination of any number
of other grid point temperatures. An MPC is requested in the Case Control
Section with the MPC = SID command. For transient analysis, an MPC must be
requested above the subcase level.
Main Index
30
Transient Analysis
Transient analysis, whether linear or nonlinear, employs a starting temperature as the initial
condition from which the solution evolves. These starting temperatures are not, in general,
arbitrary temperatures. Any noninitialized temperatures are presumed to have a value of zero.
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Interface and File Communication
3
■ Introduction to Interface and File Communication
■ Execution of MSC.Nastran
■ Input Data
■ Files Generated by MSC.Nastran
■ Plotting
Main Index
32
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 33
Interface and File Communication
NASTRAN EXAMPLE1
Main Index
34
Optional
NASTRAN statement
Optional
File Management
statements
Required Section
Executive Control
statements
Required Section
Case Control
commands
Required Section
Bulk Data
entries
The records of the first four sections are input in free-field format, and only columns 1 through
72 are used for data. Any information in columns 73 through 80 may appear in the printed echo,
but is not used by the program. If the last character in a record is a comma, then the record is
continued to the next record.
The Bulk Data entries have special free-field rules, but may be specified as fixed field. Both
options are described in the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual. The Bulk Data entries may also
make limited use of columns 73 through 80 for the purpose of continuation.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 35
Interface and File Communication
Main Index
36
The load step is labeled by the cumulative load factor. The load factor varies from 0 to
1 in each subcase. Specifically, the load step ends with 1, 2, 3, etc. for the first, the
second, and the third subcase, respectively. The data blocks containing solutions can be
generated at each increment or at the end of each subcase, depending on the
intermediate output option specified on the INTOUT field of the NLPARM Bulk Data
entry. Data blocks are stored in the database for the output process and restarts.
• The SPC Case Control command references the temperature boundary conditions in
the SPC Bulk Data entry. The applied temperature boundary condition is also
subdivided in the subcase in an incremental fashion.
• The MPC Case Control command references the algebraic temperature constraints in
the MPC Bulk Data entry. In heat transfer we can think of MPCs as perfect conductor
networks.
• The TEMP(INIT) Case Control command references the initial temperatures that are
required for all nonlinear analyses. An initialized temperature distribution must be
defined using TEMP and/or TEMPD Bulk Data entries.
• Output requests for each subcase are processed independently. Requested output
quantities for all the subcases are appended after the computational process for actual
output operation. Available outputs are as follows:
Each subcase defines a time interval starting from the last time step of the previous
subcase, and the time interval requested is subdivided into the appropriate time steps.
The data blocks containing solutions are generated at the end of each subcase to store
in the database for output process and restarts.
• The DLOAD and/or NONLINEAR command must be used to specify time-dependent
loading conditions. The static thermal load entries QVOL, QVECT, QHBDY, and
QBDYi may be used in defining a dynamic load as specified by the TLOADi entry. The
set identification number (SID) on the static load entries is specified in the DAREA field
of the TLOADi entry. The TEMPBC (of TRAN type) Bulk Data entry may be requested
in the same fashion.
The input loading functions may be changed for each subcase or continued by
repeating the same DLOAD request. However, it is recommended to use the same
TLOADi Bulk Data entry for all subcases in order to maintain continuity, since the
TLOADi entry defines the loading history as a function of cumulative time.
• Temperature initial conditions are requested above the subcase level with the IC Case
Control command. Initial temperatures are specified on TEMP and/or TEMPD Bulk
Data entries.
• Output requests for each subcase are processed independently. Requested output
quantities for all the subcases are appended after the computational process for the
actual output operation. The available output is as follows:
Main Index
38
Miscellaneous Input
The input file might also include required resident operating system job control language (JCL)
statements. The type and number of JCL statements varies with the particular computer
installation.
The input file may be formed by the insertion of other files with the INCLUDE statement. This
INCLUDE statement may be specified in any of the five parts of the input file.
Comments may be inserted in any of the parts of the input file. They are identified by a dollar
sign ($) in column 1. Columns 2 through 72 may contain any desired text.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 39
Interface and File Communication
.dat The input file describing the model, the type of solution, the output requests,
etc. Generated with a text editor or preprocessor.
.f06 The main output file containing the printed output such as temperature,
temperature gradients, heat flows, etc.
.f04 A history of the assigned files, disk space usage, and modules used during the
analysis. Useful for debugging.
.log A summary of the command lines options used and the execution links.
.DBALL A database containing the input files, assembled matrices, and solutions. Used
for restarting the job for additional analysis.
.MASTER The file containing the master directory of the files used by the run and the
physical location of the files on the system. This file is also needed for a restart
job.
.USRSOU Used only for advanced DMAP applications. This file may be deleted after the
run is finished. It is not needed for restarts.
.USROBJ Used only for advanced DMAP applications. This file may be deleted after the
run is finished. It is not needed for restarts.
.plt Contains the plot information requested with the NASPLT command specified
in the input file.
.pch Contains the punch output as requested in the input file.
.xdb Graphics database used by MSC.XL and MSC.Aries for postprocessing of the
results.
miscellaneous Several scratch files are generated during the analysis which MSC.Nastran
scratch files automatically deletes upon completion of the run.
SCR (scratch) Command. If no restarts or database manipulations are planned, then the
MASTER, DBALL, USRSOU, and USROBJ files can be automatically deleted (scratched) upon
completion of the run by adding the statement SCR = YES to the execution command. For
example,
Failure to delete these files may prohibit subsequent reruns of the same input file.
The .dat, .f06, .f04, .log, and .pch files are ASCII files and can be viewed using any text editor.
The remaining files are binary, and as such, cannot be viewed. The binary files are not intended
to be used directly; they are used for additional analysis, such as restarts or postprocessing. If no
Main Index
40
restarts are planned, you may specify “scr = yes” when submitting the input file for execution.
The .DBALL, .MASTER, .USROBJ, and .USRSOU files are placed on the scratch directory and are
automatically deleted upon completion of the run.
The .USEROBJ and .USRSOU files are intended only for DMAP users and may be deleted after
the run is complete. The .plt file is a binary file that contains the plotting information generated
by NASPLT, the MSC.Nastran internal plotting feature. If NASPLT is not used, the .plt file is
deleted following the completion of the run. If punch output is specified, the .pch file is retained
when the run is complete. The .xdb binary file is the graphic database used by MSC.XL,
MSC.Aries, and other graphics pre- and postprocessors. It is requested using PARAM,POST in
the Bulk Data Section. (Refer to the description of PARAM,POST in “Parameters” on page 601
of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.)
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 41
Interface and File Communication
3.5 Plotting
MSC.Nastran has the ability to generate structural plots or X-Y plots rom batch program
executions. Such plots are requested by placing data commands at the end of the Case Control
Section. Plot requests are separated from the Case Control by the OUTPUT(PLOT),
OUTPUT(XYPLOT), or OUTPUT(XYOUT) commands. Data above this command is not
recognized by the plotter.
For virtually any type of plotter hardware, the plotter programs are executed by
NASPLT ‘name.plt’
TEKPLT ‘name.plt’
for a “TEKTRONIX-like” plot. The ‘name.plt’ is the filename of the plot file generated from
MSC.Nastran. These programs are delivered with the utility files.
The following discussion is limited to a description of all of the commands required to obtain
undeformed structure, thermal contour, and X-Y plots in thermal analysis.
Structural Plotting
In thermal analysis, structural plotting is applied to display the model geometry (undeformed
structure plots) and the temperature distribution across the model (thermal contour plots). The
structural plotting is requested in the Case Control Section by the plotting commands from an
OUTPUT(PLOT) command to either a BEGIN BULK, OUTPUT(XYPLOT), or OUTPUT(XYOUT)
command.
Plot Set Selection. MSC.Nastran plots consist of element images. Grid points are identified by
the intersection of the elements. Note that the surface elements CHBDYE, CONV, CONVM, and
RADBC cannot be plotted. The SET command is required to specify sets of elements for plotting.
Examples are as follows:
SET 1 = ALL
SET 2 = BAR, QUAD4, EXCEPT 10, 50 THRU 90 BY 20
SET 3 = 1, 5 THRU 10, 100 THRU 105, 210
SET 4 = ALL EXCEPT HBDY
In these examples, SET 1 includes all elements, SET 2 includes all CBAR and CQUAD4 elements
except elements 10, 50, 70, and 90, SET 3 includes a subset of elements selected by their ID
numbers, and SET 4 includes all elements except CHBDYi surface elements.
Only one set of elements can be selected for a particular plot. To request an undeformed
structural plot, the following two commands are required:
Main Index
42
where i identifies one of the sets described in the SET command and j defines an origin for the
plot. If j is equal to i, the program finds the origin automatically and positions the plot in the
center of the viewing window. If some other origin is desired, the ORIGIN command should be
used. In particular, the ORIGIN command should be used if more than ten plot sets are
requested.
• PLOTTER = {NAST}
Selects plotter. The default is NAST.
• AXES R, S, T
VIEW γ , β , α
where:
R, S, T = X or MX, Y or MY, Z or MZ (where “M” implies the negative axis)
γ , β , α = three angles of rotation in degrees (Real)
Defines the orientation of the object in relation to the observer. The observer’s
coordinate system is defined as R, S, T, and the basic coordinate system of the object is
defined as X, Y, Z. The angular relationship between the two systems is defined by the
three angles α , β , and γ as follows:
S
β
α
R Direction of View
(Always in the negative R-
direction. The projection
plane is always in, or parallel
to, the S-T plane.)
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 43
Interface and File Communication
The two coordinate systems are coincident (i.e., X is coincident with R, etc.) for γ = β
= α = 0. The sequence in which the rotations are taken was arbitrarily chosen as: γ , the
rotation about the T-axis; followed by β , the rotation about the S-axis; followed by α ,
the rotation about the R-axis. Normally, α is not used since it does not affect the
appearance of the S-T projection, only its orientation on the page. The default values of
the rotations are γ = 34.27°, β = 23.17°, and α = 0.0°, which produce a plot in which
unit vectors on the X-, Y-, and Z-axes have equal lengths.
The default view described above may be altered in two ways. The structural axes that
coincide with the R-, S-, T-axes may be interchanged by means of the “AXES R, S, T”
command, and the view angles can be rotated by the “VIEW γ , β , α ” command. The
default forms of these commands are
AXES X, Y, Z
VIEW 34.27, 23.17, 0.0
To view the structure from the positive Y-axis, use the commands
AXES Y, Z, X
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
that points the Z-axis toward the right and the X-axis upward in the plot, or use
AXES Y, MX, Z
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
that points the X-axis toward the left (in this expression MX means that the minus X-
axis coincides with S) and points the Z-axis upward. Note that the expression
AXES Y, X, Z
provides a mirror image of the structure. In order to avoid a mirror image, the sequence
of axes must obey the right-hand rule.
The structure can be viewed from the position Z-axis by the expression
AXES Z, X, Y
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
Other combinations of AXES and VIEW commands produce any desired views of the
structure. For example,
Main Index
44
• Controls the spacing of the characters; the default value is 0.5. A value of 1.8 produces
good spacing of output characters. The CSCALE command must immediately precede
the PLOTTER selection command. If a second CSCALE command is used, a second
PLOTTER selection command must also be used.
• PTITLE = {any legitimate character string}
Title to be printed at the top of the plot on the line below the sequence number. The
default value for the text is all blanks.
GRID POINTS
PLOT i 1 , i 2 THRU i 3 , i 4 , etc., SET j, ORIGIN k, LABEL ELEMENTS
BOTH
GRID POINTS
• LABEL ELEMENTS - Label either the grid points and/or the
BOTH
CONTOUR MAGNIT
where “MAGNIT” is a mnemonic for a “magnitude” data request that satisfies the data
processing requirement for thermal temperature contours. The CONTOUR command should be
placed immediately before the associated PLOT execution command. A THERMAL Case
Control command must appear for all grid points that are specified in the plot set definition of
contour plots.
The only change necessary to the PLOT command is the specification of CONTOUR plots. The
PLOT command then appears as:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 45
Interface and File Communication
The OUTLINE entry (optional) requests that only the outline of all the elements in the specified
set be displayed. If this entry is not specified, all of the elements included in the specified set are
displayed.
To plot thermal contours at any time step of a transient analysis, the PLOT command must
specify the desired time or time range. The PLOT command then takes the form
Here the contour plot(s) is created for all parts of the model in SET i and at time steps within the
range of t 1 and t 2 . If only t 1 is specified, the plot is generated at t = t 1 .
Example
The following sequence causes an undeformed structural plot to be selected for the entire model,
using the default values for AXES and VIEW.
OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 = ALL
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT SET 1
BEGIN BULK
Example
The following sequence causes temperature contours over the entire model to be plotted using
all default orientation view angles.
OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 = ALL
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
CONTOUR MAGNIT
PLOT CONTOUR, SET 1
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
Example
The following sequence causes three plots to be generated.
Main Index
46
OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 = ALL
SET 2 = BAR, QUAD4
SET 3 = 14 THRU 44, 100 THRU 147, 210
$FIRST PLOT
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT SET 1, ORIGIN 1
$SECOND PLOT
AXES Z, X, Y
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 2, SET 2
PLOT SET 2, ORIGIN 2
$THIRD PLOT
FIND SCALE ORIGIN 3, SET 3
PLOT SET 3, ORIGIN 3, LABEL BOTH
BEGIN BULK
The first plot uses the default values for AXES and VIEW. The second plot uses the indicated
overrides. The third plot uses the same view options as the previous plot, which is the default
for multiple plots. It also uses the option to label both grid points and elements. Note that in all
cases the FIND command immediately precedes the PLOT command and follows any AXES or
VIEW commands that are explicitly present. Any other sequence for these commands results in
improperly scaled plots.
Example
The following sequence generates three plots using more spacing of characters.
OUTPUT (PLOT)
CSCALE = 1.8
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1 = ALL
SET 2 = QUAD4
$FIRST PLOT
PTITLE = BASIC MODEL
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT SET 1, ORIGIN 1
$SECOND PLOT
PTITLE = LABEL GRIDS
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 2, SET 2
PLOT SET 2 LABEL GRIDS
$THIRD PLOT
PTITLE = THERMAL CONTOURS
CONTOUR MAGNIT
PLOT CONTOUR, TIME 5.0, ORIGIN 1, SET 1, OUTLINE
BEGIN BULK
The first plot is a simple undeformed structural plot of the entire model and has the title “BASIC
MODEL”. The second plot is the same type of plot for all CQUAD4 elements in the model. The
plot title is “LABEL GRIDS”. This plot has its own scale and magnification factor as requested
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 47
Interface and File Communication
by its unique FIND SCALE command. The third plot is a contour plot over the entire model for
the temperatures at time 5.0. Since this plot does not have its own FIND SCALE command, the
view has the same orientation as does the first plot. Its title is “THERMAL CONTOURS.”
X-Y Plotting
In transient thermal analysis, X-Y plotting is used to track the temperature-time history or the
heat flux/time history of grid points. It can also be applied in steady state analysis to plot
temperature versus a set of grid points. In addition to the plots, X-Y tabular output may be
printed or punched, and a summary of data (e.g., maximum and minimum values as well as the
locations of these values) may be obtained for any X-Y output.
The X-Y output is requested via a packet in the Case Control Section. This packet includes all of
the commands between either OUTPUT(XYPLOT) or OUTPUT(XYOUT) and either BEGIN
BULK or OUTPUT(PLOT).
If only the required commands are used, the graphic control options assume all the default
values. Curves using default parameters have the following general characteristics:
• Tic marks are drawn on all edges of the frame. Five spaces are provided on each edge
of the frame.
• All tic marks are labeled with their values.
• Linear scales are used.
• Scales are selected such that all points fall within the frame.
• The plotter points are connected with straight lines.
• The plotted points are not identified with symbols.
The above characteristics may be modified by inserting any number of parameter definition
commands before the operation command(s). The following is an overview of the parameter
definition commands and the operation commands for thermal analysis. A more complete
description is contained in “X-Y PLOT Commands” on page 525 of the .
Main Index
48
• PLOTTER = {NAST}
Selects plotter. The default is NAST.
• CLEAR
Causes all parameter values except titles (XTITLE, YTITLE, YTTITLE, YBTITLE,
TCURVE) to revert to their default values.
• CSCALE = cs (Real)
See the Parameter Definition Commands Section of Structural Plotting.
• CURVELINESYMBOL = cls (Integer)
Request for points to be connected by lines (cls = 0), identified by symbol |cls| (cls <
0), or both (cls > 0); default value is 0. The following symbols are available:
Symbol Symbol
Number
0 no symbol
1 ¥
2 ²
3 +
4 -
5
6
7
8
9
If more than one curve per frame is required, the symbol number is incremented by 1
for each curve.
• TCURVE = {any legitimate character string}
Curve title.
• XTITLE = {any legitimate character string}
Title to be used with the x-axis.
• YTITLE = {any legitimate character string}
Title to be used with y-axis. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 49
Interface and File Communication
• XMIN = x1 (Real)
XMAX = x2 (Real)
Specifies the limits of the abscissa of the curve; the default values are chosen to
accommodate all points.
• YMIN = y1 (Real)
YMAX = y2 (Real)
Specifies the limits of the ordinate of the curve; the default values are chosen to
accommodate all points. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.
YES
• XGRID =
NO
Request for drawing in the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at locations requested for tic
marks; the default value is NO. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.
YES
• YGRID =
NO
Request for drawing in the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at locations requested for tic
marks; the default value is NO. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.
Operation Commands
When a command operation is encountered, one or more frames is generated using the current
parameter specifications. The form of this command as applied in thermal analysis is
Main Index
50
XYPEAK TEMP
XYPAPLOT VELO Default is all
subcases
Note: Continuation commands may not be used until the subcase list section is reached.
Operation
The entries in the operation field have the following meanings:
Curve Type
Only one type of curve field may appear in a single operation command. However, there is no
limit to the number of such commands. The entries in the curve type field have the following
meaning:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 51
Interface and File Communication
Subcase List
The subcase list generates output for the subcase numbers that are listed. The subcase list must
be in ascending order. Default is all subcases for which solutions were obtained.
Curve Request(s)
The word “frames” represents a series of curve identifiers of the following general form:
The information between slashes (/) specifies curves that are to be drawn on the same frame.
The symbol a1 identifies the grid point or element number associated with the first plot on the
first frame. The symbol a2 identifies the grid point or element number associated with the
second plot on the first frame. The symbols d1 and d2 identify similar items for plots on the
second frame, etc. AII plot requests on one command are sorted by grid point or element ID to
improve the efficiency of the plotting process. Symbols are assigned in order by grid points or
element identification number.
The symbols b1 and b2 are codes for the items to be plotted on the upper half of the first frame,
and c1 and c2 are codes for the items to be plotted on the lower half of the first frame. If any of
the symbols b1, c1, b2, or c2 are missing, the corresponding curve is not generated. If the comma
(,) and c1 are absent along with the comma (,) and c2, full frame plots are prepared on the first
frame for the items represented by b1 and b2. For any single frame, curve identifiers must all be
of the whole frame type or all of the half frame type, i.e., the comma (,) following b1 and b2 must
be present for all entries or absent for all entries in a single frame. The symbols e1, f1, e2, and f2
serve a similar purpose for the second frame, etc. If continuation commands are needed, the
previous command may be terminated with any one of the slashes (/) or commas (,) in the
general format.
Item codes are fully described in “Item Codes” on page 777 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide. For curve types OLOAD, SPCF, TEMP, and VELO in thermal analysis, use item code T1.
For X-Y plots of heat fluxes (curve type FLUX), the item codes are
Main Index
52
Example
The following sequence causes a single whole frame to be plotted for the temperature of grid
point 5, using the default parameter values:
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPLOT TEMP/5 (T1)
BEGIN BULK
Example
The following sequence causes a single frame (consisting of an upper half frame and a lower half
frame) to be plotted using the default parameter values:
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPLOT FLUX/70 (7,9) ,80(7,9)
OUTPUT (PLOT)
Each half frame contains two curves. The x-direction heat fluxes of the CHEXA element number
70 and the CPENTA element number 80 are plotted on the upper half frame. The z-direction heat
fluxes are plotted on the lower half frame for these two elements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 53
Interface and File Communication
Example
The following sequence causes three whole frames to be plotted using the default parameter
values:
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPLOT VELO /11(T1),12(T1)
XYPLOT OLOAD/21(T1),22(T1)
XYPLOT SPCF /31(T1),32(T1)
OUTPUT (PLOT)
Each frame contains two curves. The first plot is the enthalpy at grid points 11 and 12. The
second plot is the linear loads applied at grid points 21 and 22. The third plot is the single-point
forces of constraint applied at grid points 31 and 32.
Example
The following sequence causes two whole frame plots to be generated, one for CHBDYi element
numbers 10 and 20 and the other for CHBDYi element numbers 30 and 40:
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME IN SECONDS
YTITLE = FREE CONVECTION AND RADIATION OF THE CHBDYi ELEMENTS
XGRID = YES
YGRID = YES
CURVELINESYMB = 6
XYPLOT FLUX/10(5),10(7) ,20(5) ,20 (7) /30(5) ,30(7) ,40(5) ,40(7)
BEGIN BULK
Each plot contains the free convection and radiation heat flows for two CHBDYi elements. The
default parameters are modified to include titles and grid lines in both the x-direction and y-
direction. Distinct symbols are used for each curve. The first curve is identified by circles ( ),
the second curve by squares ( ), the third curve by diamonds ( ), and the fourth curve by
triangles ( ).
Example
The following sequence causes three whole frames to be generated:
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME
YTITLE = TEMPERATURE
XGRID = YES
YGRID = YES
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1),2(T1),3(T1)
YTITLE = Y-FLUX OF THE QUAD4 ELEMENTS
XYPLOT FLUX/10(8)
YTITLE = FORCED CONVECTION OF THE CHBDYi ELEMENTS
XYPLOT FLUX/31(6), 32(6)
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
54
The first plot is the temperatures for grid points 1, 2, and 3. The second plot is the heat flux in the
y-direction for CQUAD4 element number 10. The third plot is the forced convection heat flows
for CHBDYi element numbers 31 and 32. The default parameters are modified to include titles
and grid lines in both the x-direction and y-direction.
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = ZAXIS
YTITLE = TEMPERATURE
XGRID = YES
YGRID = YES
CURVELINESYMB = 6
XYPLOT TEMP/99(T1)
BEGIN BULK
.
.
.
PARAM,CURVPLOT,1
PARAM,DOPT,3
SET1,99,1,THRU,10
This example generates an X-Y plot from grid point temperatures. The abscissa of the curve
reflects the grid point IDs listed on the SET1 Bulk Data entry with an SID of 99, and the ordinate
reflects the temperatures at these grid points. In the Bulk Data, PARAM,CURVPLOT,1
suppresses SORT2-type processing and requests that X-Y plots be made with the abscissas
relating to grid point locations. Parameter DOPT controls the x spacing of these curves. The
allowable values of this parameter are shown in the following table:
1 xj – xi
2 yj – yi
3 zj – zi
4 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 55
Interface and File Communication
The default for DOPT is the length between grid points, with the first grid point listed on the
referenced SET1 command at the origin. For DOPT values 1, 2, or 3, the spacing between adjacent
points on the abscissa is proportional to one component of the distance between their grid
points. DOPT = 4 spaces the grid points equally along the abscissa.
Main Index
56
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Method of Solution
4
■ Introduction to Solution Methods
■ Nonlinear Iteration Scheme
■ Steady State Analysis
■ Transient Analysis
Main Index
58
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 59
Method of Solution
and the approximation of the vanished correction vector at the (i + 1)-th iteration, i.e.,
i
{ ψ }i + 1 ≈ { ψ }i + ∂ψ { ∆u } i = 0 Eq. 4-3
-------
∂u
where
{ ∆u } i = { u i + 1 – u i } Eq. 4-4
is the i-th incremental displacement vector. The above equation can be rewritten as
[ K T ] i { ∆u } i = { R } i Eq. 4-5
where:
At each iteration, the left-hand side matrix [ K T ] i and the right-hand side vector { R } i are
computed based on the temperature vector { u } i . By solving the unknown vector { ∆u } i , the
displacement vector at the (i + 1)-th iteration can be calculated from
{ u } i + 1 = { u } i + { ∆u } i Eq. 4-6
Since matrix decomposition is time consuming, MSC.Nastran does not update the left-hand side
matrix at each iteration. The tangential matrix is updated only when the solution fails to
converge or the iteration efficiency can be improved. However, the residual vector is updated at
each iteration.
In concert with Newton’s method, the following options are provided to improve the efficiency
of the iteration:
Main Index
60
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 61
Method of Solution
4
[ K ] { u } + [ ℜ ] { u + T abs } = { P } + { N } Eq. 4-7
where:
The components of the applied heat flow vector { P } are associated either with surface heat
transfer or with heat generated inside the volume heat conduction elements. The vector of
nonlinear heat flows { N } results from boundary radiation, surface convection, and
temperature-dependent thermal loads.
The equilibrium equation is solved by a Newton iteration scheme where the tangential stiffness
matrix is approximated by
i
∂N
[ K T ] i ≈ [ K ] i + 4 [ ℜ ] i { u i + T abs } 3 – ------
- Eq. 4-8
∂u
ANALYSIS = HEAT
in the Case Control Section of the input data for thermal analysis. The input data file may then
appear as:
Main Index
62
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE
ANALYSIS = HEAT
NLPARM = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
.
.
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,10,....
.
.
TEMP,20,.....
TEMPD,20,....
ENDDATA
The NLPARM entry is required to control the incremental and iterative solution processes. For
nonlinear problems, a set of temperatures should be provided for an initial guess. These
temperatures are specified on TEMP and TEMPD Bulk Data entries and are selected by a
TEMP(INIT) Case Control command.
Convergence Criteria
The convergence criteria are characterized by the dimensionless error functions and the
convergence tolerances. To ensure accuracy and efficiency, multiple criteria with errors
measured about temperatures, loads, and energy are provided.
1. Temperature error function
Since the error in temperatures is not known, a contraction factor q is introduced to
formulate the temperature error function, which is defined as
ui + 1 – ui ∆u i
q = -------------------------------
- = ------------------------ Eq. 4-10
ui – ui – 1 ∆u i – 1
2 ∆u i 1
q i = --- ------------------------ + --- q i – 1 Eq. 4-11
3 ∆u i – 1 3
with an initial value q 0 = 0.99. If q is assumed to be constant with a value less than
unity, the absolute error in temperatures can be estimated by
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 63
Method of Solution
u – ui + 1 ≤ u – ui + n + ui + n – ui + n – 1 + … + ui + 2 – ui + 1
= ∆u i ( q n + q n – 1 + … + q )
Eq. 4-12
q
= ∆u i -------------
1–q
The temperature error function is formulated by introducing the weighted
normalization to the above equation, i.e.,
∑ ω j ∆u j
q ω ⋅ ∆u q j Eq. 4-13
E u = ------------- ----------------------- = ------------- --------------------------
1–q ω⋅u 1–q
∑ ωj uj
j
where the weighting function { ω } is defined as the square root of the diagonal terms
of the tangential matrix [ K T ] , i.e.,
ωj = KT Eq. 4-14
jj
∑ Rj uj
R⋅u j
E p = -------------------- = ----------------------- Eq. 4-15
P' ⋅ u
∑ P'j u j
j
with
where { P ld } is the applied thermal load at the previous loading step, and { ∆P ld } is
the incremental load.
3. Energy error function
The energy (or work) error function is defined as
∑ R j ∆u j
R ⋅ ∆u j
E w = ----------------------- ---------------------------- Eq. 4-17
P' ⋅ u
∑ P'j u j
j
At every iteration, error functions are computed and printed in the convergence table under the
headings EUI, EPI, and EWI. The convergence test is performed by comparing the error
functions with the convergence tolerances, i.e.,
Main Index
64
where EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW are tolerances specified on the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. The
solution has converged if these tests are satisfied. However, only those criteria selected by the
user (specified in the CONV field of the NLPARM entry) are checked for convergence. Note that
the tolerances should not be too tight to waste iteration time or too loose to affect accuracy. It is
recommended that the default values be used until better values are found through iteration
experience.
Iteration Control
The incremental and iterative solution processes are controlled by the parameters specified on
the NLPARM Bulk Data entry, with the data format and default values described as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NLPARM ID NINC DT KMETHOD KSTEP MAXITER CONV INTOUT
+NP2 5
In thermal analysis, the arc-length method (specified by NLPCI command) is disabled. The DT,
FSTRESS, MAXR, and RTOLB fields are also ignored and should be left blank for heat transfer.
The ID field specifies an integer selected by the Case Control request NLPARM. For each
subcase, load and SPC temperature changes are processed incrementally with a number of equal
subdivisions defined by the NINC value.
The KMETHOD and KSTEP fields specify the tangential matrix update strategy. Three separate
options for KMETHOD may be selected.
• AUTO
The program automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on convergence
rates. At each iteration, the number of steps required to converge as well as the
computing time with and without matrix update are estimated. The tangential matrix
is updated if (a) the estimated number of iterations to converge exceeds MAXITER,
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 65
Method of Solution
(b) the estimated time required for convergence with current matrix exceeds the
estimated time to converge with matrix update, or (c) the solution diverges. The
tangential matrix is also updated on convergence if KSTEP is less than the number of
steps required for convergence with the current matrix.
• SEMI
This option is identical to the AUTO option except that the program updates the
tangential matrix after the first iteration.
• ITER
The program updates the tangential matrix at every KSTEP iteration and on
convergence if KSTEP < MAXITER. However, the tangential matrix is never updated if
KSTEP > MAXITER. Note that the Newton-Raphson method is obtained if KSTEP = 1,
and the modified Newton-Raphson method is selected by setting KSTEP = MAXITER.
The number of iterations for a load increment is limited to MAXITER. If the solution does not
converge in MAXITER iterations, the load increment is bisected and the analysis is repeated. If
the load increment cannot be bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is reached or MAXBIS = 0) and MAXDIV is
positive, the best attainable solution is computed, and the analysis is continued to the next load
increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the analysis is terminated.
The convergence criteria are defined through the test flags in the CONV field and the tolerances
in the EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW fields. The requested criteria (combination of temperature
error U, load error P, and energy error W) are satisfied upon convergence.
The INTOUT controls the output requests for temperatures, heat fluxes, and heat flows. If the
option ALL or YES is selected, the output requests specified in the Case Control Data are
processed for every computed load increment. If the option is NO, the output requests are
processed only for the last load step of the subcase.
The MAXDIV limits the divergence conditions allowed for each iteration. The divergence rate
E i is defined by the ratio of energy errors before and after the iteration, i.e.,
{ ∆u i } T { R i }
E i = ----------------------------------------- Eq. 4-18
{ ∆u i } T { R i – 1 }
Depending on the divergence rate, the number of diverging iterations NDIV is incremented as
follows:
The solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV > |MAXDIV|. If the solution diverges and the
load increment cannot be bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is reached or MAXBIS = 0), the tangential
matrix is updated and the analysis is continued. If the solution diverges again and MAXDIV is
positive, the best attainable solution is computed, and the analysis is continued to the next load
increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the analysis is terminated on the second divergence.
Main Index
66
The BFGS update is performed if MAXQN > 0. As many as MAXQN quasi-Newton vectors can
be accumulated. The BFGS update with these QN vectors provides a secant modulus in the
search direction. If MAXQN is reached, the tangential matrix is updated, and the accumulated
QN vectors are purged. The accumulation resumes at the next iteration.
The line search is performed if MAXLS > 0. In the line search, the temperature increment is
scaled to minimize the energy error. The line search is not performed if the absolute value of the
relative energy error is less than the tolerance LSTOL or if the number of line searches reaches
MAXLS.
The number of bisections for a load increment is limited to |MAXBIS|. Different actions are
taken when the solution diverges, depending on the sign of MAXBIS. If MAXBIS is positive, the
tangential matrix is updated on the first divergence, and the load is bisected on the second
divergence. If MAXBIS is negative, the load is bisected every time the solution diverges until the
limit on bisection is reached. If the solution does not converge after |MAXBIS| bisections, the
analysis is continued or terminated depending on the sign of MAXDIV.
Iteration Output
At each iteration, the related output data is printed under the following heading:
{ Fg } = [ Kg ] { ug } – { Ng } – { Ng } – { Ng }
nl CONV CONVM RADBC
{ F l } = [ K l ] { u l } + [ ℜ l ] ( u l + T abs ) 4 – { N l }
nl
• Temperature increment: { ∆u l }
• Initial energy: { ∆u l } T { R l }
• New temperature vector: { u g }
• Nonlinear force vector: { F g }
• Sum of nonlinear forces including follower forces: { F l }
• New temperature vector: { u l }
• New residual vector: { R l }
• Denominator of EUI
• Denominator of EPI
• Contraction factor: q
• Remaining time
For each quasi-Newton vector set, the following is produced:
• Condition number: λ 2
• Quasi-Newton vector: δ
Main Index
68
• Quasi-Newton vector: γ
1
• Energy error: z = ---------
T
-
δj γj
Recommendations
The following are recommendations, designed to aid the user.
• Initial temperature estimate:
For highly nonlinear problems, the iterative solution is sensitive to the initial
temperature guess. It is recommended to overshoot (i.e., make a high initial guess) the
estimated temperature vector in a radiation-dominated problem.
• Incremental load:
Incremental loading reduces the imbalance of the equilibrium equation caused by
applied loads. The single-point constraints (temperature specified by SPC in the Bulk
Data) and the applied loads (specified by QBDY1, QBDY2, QBDY3, QHBDY, QVECT,
and QVOL) can be incremented. If the solution takes more iterations than the default
values of the maximum number of iterations allowed for convergence (MAXITER), the
increment size should be decreased. For linear problems, no incremental load steps are
required.
• Convergence criteria:
At the beginning stages of a new analysis, it is recommended that the defaults be used
on all options. However, the UPW option may be selected to improve the efficiency of
convergence. For problems with poor convergence, the tolerances EPSU, EPSP, and
EPSW can be increased within the limits of reasonable accuracy.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 69
Method of Solution
To take phase change into consideration, the heat diffusion equation is converted into
·
{ H } + [ K ] { u } + [ ℜ ] { u + T abs } 4 = { P } + { N } Eq. 4-20
Note: In “” on page 69, H represents enthalpy, not the convection heat transfer coefficient.
where:
The equilibrium equation is solved by Newmark’s method with adaptive time stepping.
Based on this one-step integration scheme, the time derivative of the nodal temperatures at the
(i + 1)-th iteration of the time step (n + 1) is expressed as
1 i+1
{ u n + 1 } i + 1 = --------- u n + 1 – u n + 1 – --- { u n }
· 1 ·
Eq. 4-21
θ∆t θ
where
{ u n + 1 } i + 1 = { u n + 1 } i + { ∆u n + 1 } i Eq. 4-22
and
1
--- = 2 – 2η Eq. 4-23
θ
Main Index
70
The parameter η is specified on the PARAM,NDAMP Bulk Data entry. When η = 0, ( θ = 0.5),
no numerical damping is requested. In this case, Newmark’s method is equivalent to the Crank-
Nicolson method.
For the Newton-Raphson scheme, the iteration equation is
--------
1
[B ] i + [ KT ] i { ∆u n + 1 } i = { R n + 1 } i Eq. 4-24
θ∆t- n + 1 n+1
1 1
--------- [ B n + 1 ] i + [ K T ] i ≈ --------- [ B n ] + [ K T ] Eq. 4-25
θ∆t n+1 θ∆t n
where [ K T ] is the tangential stiffness matrix evaluated at the previous time step, i.e.,
n
∂N n
[ K T ] ≈ [ K n ] + 4 [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs } 3 – ---------- Eq. 4-26
n ∂u n
i i i i i i
1} = { Pn + 1 } + { Nn + 1 } – [ Kn + 1 ] { un + 1 } – [ ℜn + 1 ] un + 1 + Ta
1 i
– --------- ( { H n + 1 } – { H n } )
θ∆t
At the first iteration, the initial conditions are
0 0 0 0
{ u n + 1 } = { u n }, [ K n + 1 ] = [ K n ], [ ℜ n + 1 ] = [ ℜ n ], and [ H n + 1 ] = { H n } Eq. 4-28
= { P n + 1 } + { N n + 1 } 0 + --- – 1 ( { P n } + { N n } )
0 1
{ Rn + 1 }
θ
1 4
Eq. 4-29
– --- ( [ K n ] { u n } + [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs } )
θ
ANALYSIS = HEAT
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 71
Method of Solution
in the Case Control Section of the input data for thermal analysis. Additionally, the initial
conditions (temperatures) and the time integration (solution time, time step size, convergence
criteria) must be specified. The input data file may then appear as
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE
ANALYSIS = HEAT
TSTEPNL = 10
IC = 20
.
.
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,10,....
.
.
TEMP,20,.....
TEMPD,20,....
ENDDATA
The TSTEPNL entry is required to specify the initial time step and the iteration control. Initial
temperatures are specified on TEMP and TEMPD Bulk Data entries and are selected by an “IC”
Case Control command. As the solution progresses, the time steps are adjusted automatically by
an adaptive time stepping scheme, which is described in the following section. It is up to the user
to specify a reasonable initial time step size. A conservative estimate can be determined as
follows.
Let:
2
χ
∆t o ≅ --------------- Eq. 4-30
10 ⋅ α
where:
and,
k = thermal conductivity,
ρ = density
C p = specific heat
Main Index
72
T
{ ∆u n } [ K T ] { ∆ u n } T
{ ∆u n } { F n – F n – 1 }
n
ω n = ----------------------------------------------------- ~ --------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 4-32
T T
{ ∆u n } { ∆H n } { ∆u n } { ∆H n }
In thermal analysis, { F n } is the heat flow vector associated with conduction, convection (CONV
and CONVM), and radiation (RADBC and RADSET), i.e.,
4
[ K n ] { un } + [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs } – { N n } – { Nn } – { Nn } Eq. 4-33
CONV CONVM R
with
Values of MSTEP and RB are specified on the TSTEPNL Bulk Data. If MSTEP is not specified, the
default value is estimated by the stiffness ratio defined as
T
{ ∆u n } { F n – F n – 1 }
λ = --------------------------------------------------------
T
- Eq. 4-36
{ ∆u n } [ K T ] { ∆ u n }
n
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 73
Method of Solution
λ* = λ if λ ≥ 1
1 Eq. 4-37
λ* = --- if λ < 1
λ
and
The adjusted time step size is limited to the upper and lower bounds, i.e.,
where DT is the user-specified time increment and MAXR and MAXBIS are user-defined entries
specified on the TSTEPNL entry. The time step is set to the limit if it falls outside the bounds.
When the time marches to a value close to the last time specified by the user, the adaptive
stepping scheme stops for the current subcase. The termination criterion is
N
∆t N
∑ ∆t n + --------- ≤ DT ⋅ NDT
2
Eq. 4-40
n = 1
where DT ⋅ NDT is the user-specified time duration for the current subcase. The adjusted time
step remains effective across the subcases.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TSTEPNL ID NDT DT NO METHOD KSTEP MAXITER CONV
Main Index
74
In thermal analysis, the options AUTO and TSTEP (specified in METHOD field) are disabled.
The FSTRESS and RTOLB fields are also ignored and should be left blank for heat transfer.
The ID field specifies an integer selected by the Case Control command TSTEPNL. The initial
time increment and the number of time steps are specified by DT and NDT. Since the time
increment is adjusted during the analysis, the actual number of time steps may not be equal to
NDT. However, the total time duration is close to NDT ⋅ DT .
For printing and plotting purposes, data recovery is performed at time steps O, NO, 2 • NO, ...,
and the last converged step. The Case Control command OTIME may also be used to control the
output times.
Since both linear and nonlinear problems are solved by the same solution sequence, only the
ADAPT option can be selected in the METHOD field for heat transfer. The ADAPT method
automatically adjusts the incremental time and uses bisection. During the bisection process, the
heat capacitance matrix and the tangential stiffness matrix are updated every KSTEP-th
converged bisection solution.
The number of iterations for a time step is limited to MAXITER. If MAXITER is negative, the
analysis is terminated on the second divergence condition during the same time step or when
the solution diverges for five consecutive time steps. If MAXITER is positive, the program
computes the best solution and continues the analysis until divergence occurs again. If the
solution does not converge in MAXITER iterations, the process is considered divergent. Either
bisection or matrix update is activated when the process diverges.
The convergence criteria are defined through the test flags in the CONV field and the tolerances
in the EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW fields. The requested criteria (combination of temperature
error U, load error P, and work error W) are satisfied upon convergence. Note that at least two
iterations are required to check the temperature convergence criterion.
MAXDIV limits the divergence conditions allowed for each iteration. Depending on the
divergence rate, the number of diverging iteration NDIV is incremented as follows:
where:
i = T
E1 { ∆u i } { R i }
-------------------------------------
{ ∆u i } { R i – 1 }
i = E pi
E2
--------------
E pi – 1
The solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV reaches MAXDIV. If the bisection option is used,
the time step is bisected upon divergence. Otherwise, the left-hand side matrices are updated,
and the computation for the current time step is repeated. If NDIV reaches MAXDIV again
within the same time step, the analysis is terminated.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 75
Method of Solution
The BFGS update and the line search process are performed in the same way as in steady state
analysis. Nonzero values of MAXQN and MAXLS activate the quasi-Newton update and the
line search process, respectively.
The number of bisections for a load increment is limited to |MAXBIS|. Different actions are
taken when the solution diverges, depending on the sign of MAXBIS. If MAXBIS is positive and
the solution does not converge after MAXBIS bisections, the best solution is computed and the
analysis is continued to the next time step. If MAXBIS is negative and the solution does not
converge in |MAXBIS| bisections, the analysis is terminated.
ADJUST controls the automatic time stepping in the following ways:
1. If ADJUST = 0, the automatic adjustment is deactivated.
2. If ADJUST > 0, the time increment is continually adjusted for the first few steps until a
good value of ∆t is obtained. After this initial adjustment, the time increment is
adjusted every ADJUST-th time step only.
3. If ADJUST is one order greater than NDT, the automatic adjustment is deactivated after
the initial adjustment.
Parameters MSTEP and RB are used to adjust the time increment. The upper and lower bounds
of time step size are defined with MAXR. If the solution approaches steady state (checked by
tolerance UTOL), the time step size is doubled. Detailed computations involving these
parameters are described in the previous section.
Iteration Output
At each iteration or time step, the related output data are printed under the following heading:
λi ui – ui – 1
E ui = -------------------------------------- Eq. 4-42
( 1 – λ i )u max
R i
E pi = -------------------------------------------------- Eq. 4-43
max ( F n , P t )
n
where
Main Index
76
P t = { P n } + { N n } ld – { F n } Eq. 4-44
n
where { N n } = { Nn } + { Nn } + { Nn }
ld QBDY3 QVECT QVOL
{ ui – ui – 1 }T{ R }i
E wi = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 4-45
max { u n } T { F n }, { u n } T P t
n
Diagnostic messages are requested by DIAG 50 or 51 in the Executive Control Section. DIAG 50
only prints subcase status, TSTEPNL data, and iteration summary, while DIAG 51 prints all data
at each iteration. In general, the user should be cautioned against using DIAG 51, because it is
used for debugging purposes only and the volume of output is significant. It is recommended
that DIAG 51 be used only for small test problems. The diagnostic output is summarized as
follows:
For each entry into NLTRD2, the following is produced:
• TSTEPNL data.
• Core statistics (ICORE, etc).
• Problem statistics (g-size, etc.).
• File control block.
• Input file status.
For each time step, the following is produced:
• NOLINi vector: { N d }
• External load vector: { P d }
• Load vector including follower forces and NOLINs: { P td }
• Constant portion of residual vector: { R' d }
• Total internal force: { F d }
• Initial residual vector: { R d }
For each iteration, the following is produced:
• Temperature vector: { u d }
• Nonlinear internal force: { F d } nl , which is
4
= [ K d ] { ud } + [ ℜ d ] { u d + T abs } – { N d } – { Nd } – { Nd } Eq. 4-47
l nl CONV CONVM R
• NOLINi vector: { N d }
• Enthalpy vector: { H d }
• Load vector including follower forces and NOLINs: { P td } , which is
{ P td } = { P d } + { N d } – { F d } Eq. 4-49
ld
where { N d } = { Nd } + { Nd } + { Nd }
ld QBDY3 QVECT QVOL
• Residual vector: { R d }
• Iteration summary (convergence factors, line search data, etc.)
For each quasi-Newton vector set, the following is produced:
2
• Condition number: λ
• quasi-Newton vector: δ
Main Index
78
• quasi-Newton vector: γ
1
• Energy error: = ---------
T
-
δj γj
Recommendations
The following are recommendations designed to aid the user.
• Time step size
To avoid inaccurate or unstable results, a proper initial time step associated with
spatial mesh size is suggested. The selection criterion is
1 2 ρc p
∆t = --- ∆x --------- Eq. 4-50
n k
where ∆t is the time step, n is the modification number of the time scale, ∆x is the mesh
size (smallest element dimension), ρ is the material density, c p is the specific heat, and
k is the thermal conductivity. A suggested value of n is 10. For highly nonlinear
problems, a small step size is recommended.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 79
Method of Solution
• Numerical stability
Numerical stability is controlled by the parameter η (specified on the
PARAM,NDAMP Bulk Data entry). For linear problems, η = 0 (i.e., no numerical
damping) is adequate, but for nonlinear problems a larger value of η may be advisable.
Increasing the value of η improves numerical stability; however, the solution accuracy
is reduced. The recommended range of values is from 0.0 to 0.1 (default value is 0.01).
• Initial temperatures and boundary temperatures
The specification of initial temperatures and boundary condition temperatures should
be consistent. For a given point, the initial temperature should be equal to the boundary
condition temperature at t = 0.
• Convergence criteria
At the beginning stages of a new analysis, it is recommended that the defaults be used
on all options. However, the UPW option may be selected to improve the efficiency of
convergence. For nonlinear problems with time-varying boundary conditions, the U
option must be selected, because the large conductance (internally generated) affects
the calculations of the PW error functions. For problems with poor convergence, the
tolerances EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW can be increased within the limits of reasonable
accuracy.
• Fixed time step
If a fixed time step is desired, the adaptive time stepping can be deactivated by setting
ADJUST = 0 on the TSTEPNL Bulk Data.
Main Index
80
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Examples
5
■ Steady State and Transient Analysis Examples
■ Example 1a - Linear Conduction
■ Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships
■ Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient
■ Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection
■ Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition
■ Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection
■ Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes
■ Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes
■ Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary Conditions
■ Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with
Radiation Boundary Condition
■ Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with
Radiation Boundary Condition
■ Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load, Spectral
Surface Behavior
■ Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing
Main Index
82
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 83
Examples
Main Index
84
Discussion
This simplest of examples demonstrates the organization of the MSC.Nastran input data file
including the Executive, Case Control, and Bulk Data Sections for a typical heat transfer analysis.
A complete description of all available input data is available in the MSC.Nastran Quick
Reference Guide. The “Executive Control Section” on page 229, “Case Control Commands” on
page 243, and “Bulk Data Entries” on page 275 of this User’s Guide describe the input data most
commonly applied to heat transfer problems.
o CROD elements o
T 1 = 1300 K T 6 = 300 K
1 2 3 4 5 6
o
K = 204.0 W ⁄ m K
L = 0.5 m
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 85
Examples
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,6,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA
Note: SPC and NLPARM are requested in the Case Control Section.
SPCs are used to set the temperature boundary condition.
Results
The abbreviated EX1A.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-2. A plot of temperature versus
distance is shown in Figure 5-2.
Main Index
86
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.100000E+03 9.000000E+02 7.000000E+02 5.000000E+02 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1A NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.204432E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 -3.204432E+03
EXAMPLE 1A NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 87
Examples
Temperature
(°K)
1400
(0.0, 1300.)
1300
1200
(0.1, 1100.)
1100
1000
(0.2, 900.)
900
800
(0.3, 700.)
700
600
(0.4, 500.)
500
400
300 (0.5, 300.)
200
100
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)
Main Index
88
Discussion
We introduce the CHBDY surface element for the purpose of applying free convection boundary
conditions along the length of the rod. The Bulk Data entry CONV defines the convection
character and the ambient grid points. To take advantage of empirical relationships for this type
of flow field, a hand calculation is necessary to acquire the appropriate free convection heat
transfer coefficient form. To facilitate this process, we will assume a fluid film temperature of 800
degrees and use the fluid properties for air at that temperature in our calculations. In “Example
1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient” on page 95 we will account for the
variation of film temperature and corresponding fluid properties along the length of the rod.
o
h AVG = 1.83 W ⁄ m 2 K
o
o T ∞ = 300 K
T 1 = 1300 K
1 2 3 4 5 6
C p Specific heat
ν Kinematic viscosity
k Thermal conductivity
Pr Prandtl number
Gr Grashof number
Nu Nusselt number
T w Wall temperature
T ∞ Ambient temperature
d Diameter
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 89
Examples
Cp = o
1.098 KJ ⁄ Kg K
ν = .823 × 10 – 4 m 2 ⁄ s
k = o
.058 W ⁄ m K
Pr = .689
Gr = gβd 3 ( T w – T ∞ )
------------------------------------------
ν2
= m 1 o
9.80 ----- ⋅ ------------------ ⋅ ( .10 ) 3 m 3 ⋅ 1000 K
s 2 800 oK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
–4 m 4
( .823 × 10 ) --------
s2
= 1.8 × 10 6
Gr ⋅ Pr = 1.25 × 10 6
for
COEF = .53
(see J. P. Holman, Heat Transfer)
m = .25
so
gβd 3 m
Nu = ------ = COEF ------------- ⋅ Pr ⋅ ( T – T ∞ )
hd
k ν2
or
.25
.53 ( .058 ) 9.80 ( 1 ⁄ 800 ) ( .10 ) 3 ( .689 )
h = ------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------- ( T – T ∞ ) .25
.10
2
( .823 × 10 – 4 )
Main Index
90
therefore
o
h ≅ 1.83 ( T – T ∞ ) .25 W ⁄ m 2 K
This form may be input on the PCONV and MAT4 Bulk Data entries.
The MSC.Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-3.
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.83
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 91
Examples
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593
$
CONV,10,35,,,99,99
CONV,20,35,,,99,99
CONV,30,35,,,99,99
CONV,40,35,,,99,99
CONV,50,35,,,99,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.25
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
92
Listing 5-4
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.83
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
Results
The abbreviated EX1B.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-5. Because this analysis is nonlinear,
note the existence of numerical iteration until satifsfactory values of EPSP and EPSW (NLPARM
entry defaults) have been attained. A plot of temperature versus distance is shown in Figure 5-4.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 93
Examples
N O N - L I N E A R I T E R A T I O N M O D U L E O U T P U T
STIFFNESS UPDATE TIME .49 SECONDS SUBCASE 1
ITERATION TIME .01 SECONDS LOAD FACTOR 1.000
- - - CONVERGENCE FACTORS - - - - - - LINE SEARCH DATA - - -
ITERATION EUI EPI EWI LAMBDA DLMAG FACTOR E-FIRST E-FINAL NQNV NLS ENIC NDV MDV
1 1.0228E-13 9.7786E-02 9.9926E-17 1.0000E-01 2.9097E+02 1.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0 0 0 1
2 1.6730E+01 1.9848E-02 3.6841E-03 1.5149E-01 6.5130E+01 1.0000E+00 -2.4629E-01 -2.4629E-01 0 0 0 1
3 2.7737E-02 1.3951E-04 3.4216E-06 7.9258E-02 4.3181E-01 1.0000E+00 4.7254E-03 4.7254E-03 1 0 0 0 1
4 2.9687E-05 3.3073E-06 4.8656E-10 5.1482E-02 1.0361E-02 1.0000E+00 -6.0088E-03 -6.0088E-03 2 0 -1 0 1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 6186,
*** SOLUTION HAS CONVERGED ***
SUBID 1 LOADINC 1 LOOPID 1 LOAD STEP 1.000 LOAD FACTOR 1.00000
^^^ DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE 9005 (NLSCSH) - THE SOLUTION FOR LOOPID= 1 IS SAVED FOR RESTART
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 10
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.225588E+03 1.169515E+03 1.130402E+03 1.107303E+03 1.099665E+03
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.352363E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S -1.352382E+03
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
94
Temperature
(°K)
1400
(0.0, 1300.)
1300
(0.1, 1226.)
1000
900
800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 95
Examples
Discussion
This problem introduces the generalized method for representation of temperature dependent
properties (MATT4,TABLEMi). In this case we wish to account for the fluid film temperature
variation along the length of our rod and consider its effect on the local heat transfer coefficient.
By default, the look-up temperature of the film node is the average temperature of the CHBDY
surface and the ambient points. This temperature varies along the length of the rod.
2.5
(400., 2.27)
(600., 2.03)
2.0 (800., 1.83)
h( T)
------------------
W
1.5
2 o -
m K
1.0
h( T)
o
T ∞ = 300 K
o
T 1 = 1300 K
1 2 3 4 5 6
q CONV = h ( T ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) .25 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ )
Main Index
96
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1c
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM
+TBM,400.0,2.27,600.0,2.03,800.0,1.83,ENDT
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 97
Examples
CONV,10,35,,,99,99
CONV,20,35,,,99,99
CONV,30,35,,,99,99
CONV,40,35,,,99,99
CONV,50,35,,,99,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.25
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
The abbreviated EX1C.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-7. A plot of temperature versus
distance is shown in Figure 5-6.
Main Index
98
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.223213E+03 1.165064E+03 1.124369E+03 1.100287E+03 1.092315E+03
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.392052E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S -1.392069E+03
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 99
Examples
Temperature
(°K)
1400
(0.0, 1300.)
1300
(0.1, 1223.)
(0.3, 1124.)
(0.4, 1100.)
1100
(0.5, 1092.)
1000
900
800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)
Main Index
100
Discussion
In the spirit of the previous example, we allow the free convection heat transfer coefficient to be
temperature dependent; however, we extend the notion of the film node to provide a film
temperature look-up value more heavily weighted toward the local surface temperatures than
the ambient temperature. The MPC (multipoint constraint) relationship is available for this
purpose. In this example, the film node temperatures become the average of the two CHBDY
surface grid points each with a weight of 1.0, and the ambient temperature is also given a
weighting of 1.0. Note that the default film node has a temperature which is the average of the
average of the surface temperature and ambient point temperatures.
For example, consider the first CHBDY element:
Default calculation (see Listing 5-6):
T∞ + T∞
T1 + T2 1 2
T FilmNode = -------------------- + --------------------------- ⁄ 2
2 2
T 1 + T 2 + 2T ∞
= --------------------------------------
4
MPC calculation:
T1 + T2 + T∞
T Film Node = -----------------------------------
3
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 101
Examples
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1d
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
MPC = 30
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,91,,91.0,91.0,91.0
GRID,92,,92.0,92.0,92.0
GRID,93,,93.0,93.0,93.0
GRID,94,,94.0,94.0,94.0
GRID,95,,95.0,95.0,95.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM
+TBM,400.0,2.27,600.0,2.03,800.0,1.83,ENDT
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593
$
CONV,10,35,91,,99,99
CONV,20,35,92,,99,99
CONV,30,35,93,,99,99
CONV,40,35,94,,99,99
CONV,50,35,95,,99,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.25
$
Main Index
102
MPC,30,91,,3.0,1,,-1.0,,+MPC91
+MPC91,,2,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,92,,3.0,2,,-1.0,,+MPC92
+MPC92,,3,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,93,,3.0,3,,-1.0,,+MPC93
+MPC93,,4,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,94,,3.0,4,,-1.0,,+MPC94
+MPC94,,5,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,95,,3.0,5,,-1.0,,+MPC95
+MPC95,,6,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1299.9
$
ENDDATA
Results
The abbreviated EX1D.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-9. A plot of temperature versus
distance is shown in Figure 5-7.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 103
Examples
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.228207E+03 1.173591E+03 1.135242E+03 1.112498E+03 1.104961E+03
91 S 9.427355E+02 9.005992E+02 8.696109E+02 8.492465E+02 8.391531E+02
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 16
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
91 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 17
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.297968E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
91 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S -1.297969E+03
Main Index
104
Temperature
(°K)
1400
(0.0, 1300.)
1300
(0.1, 1228.)
1000
900
800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 105
Examples
Discussion
Radiation heat transfer is added along the length of the rod from our previous examples. For this
case we treat the problem as one in which radiant exchange occurs between the rod and an
ambient environment at 300 °K. This can be modeled simply with a radiation boundary
condition specification. Surface emissivity variation with temperature is also accounted for.
Radiation exchange from the end of the rod has been included to illustrate the POINT type
CHBDY element.
Main Index
106
o
T ∞ = 1300 K
Radiation Boundary Condition Radiation
o
T 1 = 1300 K Boundary
Condition
1 2 3 4 5 6
0.8
(450., .75)
0.7
(700., .65)
ε(T)
(1900., .32)
0.3
250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000
T (°K)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 107
Examples
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1e
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
PARAM,TABS,0.0
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,1.0
MATT4,15,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM1
+TBM1,173.16,215.0,273.16,202.0,373.16,206.0,473.16,215.0,+TBM2
+TBM2,573.16,228.0,673.16,249.0,ENDT
$
Main Index
108
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,60,26,POINT,,,6,,,+CHP60
+CHP60,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593
PHBDY,26,.0078540
$
RADBC,99,1.0,,10,THRU,60,BY,10
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADMT,45,41,41
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM3
+TBM3,450.0,0.75,700.0,0.65,800.0,0.60,1100.0,0.50,+TBM4
+TBM4,1500.0,0.39,1900.0,0.32,ENDT
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA
Note: Parameters SIGMA and TABS are required for any radiation problem.
POINT type CHBDYP for radiation to space from the end of the rod.
Results
The abbreviated EX1E.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-11. A plot of temperature versus
distance is shown in Figure 5-9.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 109
Examples
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.140835E+03 1.026327E+03 9.476805E+02 8.996806E+02 8.795513E+02
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 5.468448E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
NONLINEAR
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S
Main Index
110
Temperature
(°K)
1400
1200
(0.1, 1141.)
1100
(0.2, 1026.)
1000
(0.3, 948.)
(0.4, 900.)
900
(0.5, 880.)
800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)
Main Index
CHAPTER 111
Discussion
Examples 2a, 2b, and 2c describe MSC.Nastran heat transfer “loads”. While we tend to think of
boundary conditions in regard to heat transfer, there are several surface conditions which we
define as loads. In an MSC.Nastran sense, a load has the flexibility of being subcase selectable.
This concept, an early carryover from structural analysis, allows the load vector to vary while
the stiffness matrix and its decomposition remain unchanged. This provided an economical
method for evaluating the effects of multiple loading states and superposition of loads. The load
set/subcase capability is less significant for heat transfer since many boundary conditions have
contributions to the coefficient matrix and are fundamentally nonlinear, eliminating any
potential for superposition of loads. In this series of examples, a single CHEXA element is used
to demonstrate the application of internal heat generation, free convection, control nodes, film
nodes, and various nonlinear effects. The temperature dependence of the heat transfer
coefficient and the heat generation rate illustrated are used.
Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection demonstrates the selection of
the internal heat generation load QVOL. A control node, which is a member of the element grid
point set, has been chosen to multiply the heat generation term as well as be the film node. We
refer to this as local control. The free convection exponent, EXPF, is set to 0.0 (FORM = 0). The
analytic expression for this example is given in Eq. 5-1.
Main Index
112
5 8
6 7
4
1
X
2
3
Z
Temperature Dependent Tabular Inputs
·
h(T) Q(T )
1000. + 1000.
h=T ·
Q = 1000. – T
0 0
T T
1000. 1000.
Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient Internal Volumetric Heat Generation Rate
EXPF
L ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T∞ )
Main Index
CHAPTER 113
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
Main Index
114
$
CONV,10,35,1,,99
CONV,20,35,1,,99
CONV,30,35,1,,99
CONV,40,35,1,,99
CONV,50,35,1,,99
CONV,60,35,1,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
Note: The load, in this case QVOL, must be requested in Case Control.
The temperature dependence on internal heat generation is requested through HGEN
on the MAT4/MATT4 entries.
Results
The abbreviated EX2A.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-13.
Main Index
CHAPTER 115
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02
7 S 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -5.928640E+06
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
116
Discussion of Variation 1
This problem extends Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection in the
implementation of local control for the internal heat generation control node and the film node
for convection. However, the same control node is now used to multiply the convection heat
transfer coefficient. The free convection exponent EXPF remains at 0.0 (FORM = 0).
The basic energy balance can be expressed as:
EXPF
L ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ U CN
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE2b1
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
Main Index
CHAPTER 117
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,1,1,99
CONV,20,35,1,1,99
CONV,30,35,1,1,99
CONV,40,35,1,1,99
CONV,50,35,1,1,99
CONV,60,35,1,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
Results of Variation 1
The abbreviated EX2B1.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-15.
Main Index
118
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02
7 S 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -2.222233E+08
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Discussion of Variation 2
A slight variation of Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection is depicted
in Eq. 5-3. The free convection relationship has been altered by introducing an EXPF value of 1.0
(FORM = 0).
The basic energy balance can be written as:
EXPF
QVOL ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ U CN
Main Index
CHAPTER 119
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2b2
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
Main Index
120
$
CONV,10,35,1,1,99
CONV,20,35,1,1,99
CONV,30,35,1,1,99
CONV,40,35,1,1,99
CONV,50,35,1,1,99
CONV,60,35,1,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,1.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
Results of Variation 2
The abbreviated EX2b2.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-17.
Main Index
CHAPTER 121
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01
7 S 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -5.110450E+07
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
122
Discussion of Variation 1
This problem provides another example of the use of film nodes. In our previous examples, the
film node was chosen to be an element grid point, meaning that the TABLEM look-up
temperature for the temperature dependent heat transfer coefficient was the actual body
temperature. More often than not, the look-up temperature should be some weighted average
of the surface temperature and ambient temperature. In this case, the default value (a blank
entry) for the film node depicts that the average of the CHBDY surface element and the
associated ambient point temperatures provide the TABLEM look up temperature (FORM = 0).
The analytic expression for this case is given in Eq. 5-4:
The basic energy balance can be expressed as:
1000 ⋅ T ⋅ ( 1000 – T ) = T
--2- ⋅ 6.0 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ T
Eq. 5-4
o
lting in, T = 434.26 C
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2c1
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
Main Index
CHAPTER 123
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,1,99
CONV,20,35,,1,99
CONV,30,35,,1,99
CONV,40,35,,1,99
CONV,50,35,,1,99
CONV,60,35,,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
124
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02
7 S 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -2.456784E+08
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Discussion of Variation 2
Eq. 5-5 describes a variation of this problem which has the control nodes removed and the value
of 0.2 introduced for EXPF (FORM = 0). It should be noted that the elimination of the control
nodes alone would have no effect on the analysis since they would have cancelled out of the
prior equations.
.20
QVOL ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T∞ )
Main Index
CHAPTER 125
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2c2
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,1,99
CONV,20,35,,1,99
CONV,30,35,,1,99
CONV,40,35,,1,99
Main Index
126
CONV,50,35,,1,99
CONV,60,35,,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.2
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
Results of Variation 2
The abbreviated EX2c2.f06 output file for Variation 2 is shown in Listing 5-21.
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02
7 S 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -2.012106E+08
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
CHAPTER 127
Discussion
Axisymmetric geometric models may be constructed using the CTRIAX6 element only. For this
element, the grid point locations are input as R,THETA,Z where the axis of symmetry is the Z
axis. The grid points lie in the RZ plane (THETA = 0.0). In this example we demonstrate the
CHBDYE statement for identifying the surface element to which the boundary condition is to be
applied. The surface type is automatically accounted for with this specification. If the CHBDYG
had been used, a TYPE field of REV would be specified. For reference, any applied loads of a
flux nature have a total load applied to the structure that is calculated based on the entire
circumferential surface area.
z
R o = 2.0 m
R i = 1.5 m
11 12 13 14 15
o
o h = 10.0 W ⁄ m 2 K
T = 300 K 6 10
o
T ∞ = 1300 K
1 2 3 4 5
C
L o
K = 204.0 W ⁄ m K
Main Index
128
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 3
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,1.500,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.625,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.750,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,1.875,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,2.000,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.500,0.0,0.125
GRID,7,,1.625,0.0,0.125
GRID,8,,1.750,0.0,0.125
GRID,9,,1.875,0.0,0.125
GRID,10,,2.000,0.0,0.125
GRID,11,,1.500,0.0,0.250
GRID,12,,1.625,0.0,0.250
GRID,13,,1.750,0.0,0.250
GRID,14,,1.875,0.0,0.250
GRID,15,,2.000,0.0,0.250
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CTRIAX6,1,15,1,2,3,8,13,7
CTRIAX6,2,15,11,12,13,7,1,6
CTRIAX6,3,15,3,4,5,10,15,9
CTRIAX6,4,15,13,14,15,9,3,8
MAT4,15,204.0,,,10.0
$
CHBDYE,10,3,2
CONV,10,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
SPC,10,99,,1300.0
SPC,10,1,,300.0,6,,300.0
SPC,10,11,,300.0
TEMP,20,99,1300.0
TEMPD,20,300.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
CHAPTER 129
Results
The abbreviated EX3.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-23.
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.000000E+02 3.076283E+02 3.147016E+02 3.212750E+02 3.274322E+02 3.000000E+02
7 S 3.076319E+02 3.146983E+02 3.212766E+02 3.274309E+02 3.000000E+02 3.076353E+02
13 S 3.146945E+02 3.212776E+02 3.274268E+02
99 S 1.300000E+03
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
13 S .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S -5.102459E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 -2.036143E+04
7 S .0 .0 .0 .0 -5.090287E+03 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0
99 S 3.055418E+04
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
130
Discussion
This series of radiative equilibrium problems illustrates various methods of flux load application
and radiation exchange with space. The first example uses a nondirectional heat flux load to
represent a solar source. A simple radiation boundary condition to space represents the loss
mechanism. A blackbody surface is initially presumed.
o
T ∞ = 0.0 R
ε = α = 1.0
3
7
4 6
Q o = 442. Btu ⁄ hr ft 2
8 AREA = 1.0 ft 2
2
5
1
Figure 5-12 Example 4a
Q = σ A ε F ( T e4 – T ∞
4)
o
or, 442. Btu ⁄ hr = .1714 × 10 – 8 Btu ⁄ hr ft 2 R 4 ⋅ 1.0 ft 2 ⋅ 1.0 ⋅ 1.0 ( T e4 – ( 460. ) 4 )
o
Resulting in, T e ≅ 281.7 F
Eq. 5-6
Main Index
CHAPTER 131
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 4a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,459.67
PARAM,SIGMA,.1714E-8
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,0.0,0.5
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,0.0,0.5
GRID,8,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD8,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CQD8
+CQD8,7,8
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA8,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
QHBDY,200,AREA8,442.0,,1,2,3,4,+QHBDY
+QHBDY,5,6,7,8
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
132
Results
The abbreviated EX4a.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-25.
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02
7 S 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S -3.683333E+01 -3.683333E+01 -3.683334E+01 -3.683333E+01 1.473333E+02 1.473333E+02
7 S 1.473333E+02 1.473333E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
CHAPTER 133
Discussion
Heat loads from a distant source can be treated in a directional sense with the QVECT Bulk Data
entry. The absorptivity is made available from a RADM Bulk Data entry. In this case, the
radiation boundary condition also uses this absorptivity in its exchange relationship. For
illustrative purposes, the angle of incidence was varied to create a plot of equilibrium
temperature versus θ .
3 n̂
θ
4
Q0
2
Qx
Q x = sin θ = E1
QVECT
Q y = cos θ = E2 vary θ
θ
Qy Q Z = 0 = E3
Q 0 = 442. Btu ⁄ hr ft 2
o
ε = α = 1.0, T ∞ = 0.0 F
Main Index
134
Direction Cosines
Main Index
CHAPTER 135
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 4b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,459.67
PARAM,SIGMA,.1714E-8
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
QVECT,200,442.0,,,.984808,-.173648,0.0,,+QVCT1
+QVCT1,10
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
The abbreviated EX4b.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-27. Figure 5-14 describes equilibrium
temperature versus angle of incident radiation.
Main Index
136
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 8.717700E+01 8.717700E+01 8.717700E+01 8.717700E+01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.918810E+01 1.918810E+01 1.918810E+01 1.918810E+01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14
Main Index
CHAPTER 137
Temperature
(°F)
300
(10.0, 279.6)
(20.0, 272.2)
(0.0, 282.0) (30.0, 259.8)
250 (40.0, 241.8)
(50.0, 217.6)
200
(60.0, 185.8)
100
(80.0, 87.2)
50
(90.0, 0.0)
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
θ (degrees)
Main Index
138
Discussion
Wavelength dependent surface properties can be incorporated in the radiation boundary
condition or any radiation enclosure. For this simple radiative equilibrium problem, we
demonstrate the principles by using a perfectly selective surface-a surface that behaves like a
perfect blackbody ( ε = 1.0) below some finite cutoff wavelength and does not participate above
that wavelength. Appendix G describes the mathematics underlying the waveband
approximation to spectral radiation exchange. The RADBND Bulk Data entry supplies the
wavelength break points and the RADM Bulk Data entry provides the band emissivities. The
solar source (QVECT) for the analysis is treated as a blackbody at a temperature of 10400 °R .
Qe
3
Qa
αλ ( λ ) 2
4
1.0
1
λc λ
Main Index
CHAPTER 139
4000
(3275)
3000 (2760)
(2410)
T eq (°R)
(2150) The input listing
(1890) corresponds to the
2000
λc = 0.6 µm
condition.
1000
α = ε = 1.0, 0 ≤ λ ≤ ∞
713
0
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
λ c ( µm )
Main Index
140
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 4c
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPCF = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,.1714E-8
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0,0.0
RADBND,3,25898.0,0.6,0.6
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
QVECT,200,442.0,10400.0,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,0,+QVECT
+QVECT,10
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,2500.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
The abbreviated EX4c.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-29.
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.275139E+03 3.275139E+03 3.275139E+03 3.275139E+03
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 9
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 4.153704E+01 4.153704E+01 4.153704E+01 4.153704E+01
99 S .0
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 11
Main Index
142
Discussion
A simple geometry composed of four plate elements is used to demonstrate radiant exchange in
an enclosure. Every surface to participate in the exchange is identified with an CHBDYi Bulk
Data entry surface element, in this case providing five surface elements. Only one RADCAV
Bulk Data entry is defined in this example indicating that a single enclosure cavity has been
defined. For this configuration, shadowing must be considered when calculating the view
factors.
The statements essential to the radiation solution process are described as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 143
15 14
2 6 10
13
16
3 7 11
~
1 x
5 9
2000 °K 4
8 12
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 5a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,4,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,5,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
Main Index
144
GRID,8,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,9,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,2.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,11,,2.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,12,,2.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,13,,1.5,0.0,-1.0
GRID,14,,1.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,15,,0.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,16,,0.5,0.0,-1.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
CQUAD4,2,5,5,6,7,8
CQUAD4,3,5,9,12,11,10
CQUAD4,4,5,13,14,15,16
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,5,6,7,8
CHBDYG,21,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG21
+CHG21,5,8,7,6
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,9,12,11,10
CHBDYG,40,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG40
+CHG40,13,14,15,16
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADSET,65
RADCAV,65,,YES
VIEW,55,65,KBSHD
VIEW,56,65,KSHD
VIEW,57,65,NONE
VIEW3D,65,,,,,,,3
$
SPC,10,1,,2000.0,2,,2000.0
SPC,10,3,,2000.0,4,,2000.0
TEMPD,20,2000.0
$
ENDDATA
Note: The CQUAD4 element with an EID = 2 has two surface elements associated with it.
The direction of the CHBDYG surface normals are important for any radiation
exchange.
Shadowing flags can save vast amounts of computation time for large problems.
Main Index
CHAPTER 145
Results
The abbreviated EX5a.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-31. Included in this output is a
tabulation of the view factor calculation. The details of this output are discussed in“View Factor
Calculation Methods” on page 409. Because the view factor summations are less than 1.0, there
is considerable energy lost to space. The punch file of radiation view factors is shown in
Listing 5-32.
Main Index
146
*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 65 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
10 - 21 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
10 30 1.0000E+00 6.84135E-02 6.84135E-02 7.3895E-02 NO NO
10 40 1.0000E+00 4.08547E-02 4.08547E-02 6.6278E-02 NO NO
10 30 1.0000E+00 0.00000E+00 0.00000E+00 0/256
10 21 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
10 -SUM OF 2.40799E-01 2.40799E-01
20 - 30 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
20 40 1.0000E+00 1.31841E-02 1.31841E-02 2.0133E-02 YES NO
20 40 1.0000E+00 1.16713E-02 1.16713E-02
20 30 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
20 -SUM OF 2.11616E-01 2.11616E-01
21 - 40 1.0000E+00 1.31841E-02 1.31841E-02 2.0133E-02 YES NO
21 40 1.0000E+00 1.16713E-02 1.16713E-02
21 -SUM OF 2.11616E-01 2.11616E-01
30 - 40 1.0000E+00 4.08547E-02 4.08547E-02 6.6278E-02 NO NO
30 -SUM OF 2.40799E-01 2.40799E-01
40 -SUM OF 1.05052E-01 1.05052E-01
^^^ DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE 9048 (NLSCSH) - LINEAR ELEMENTS ARE CONNECTED TO THE ANALYSIS SET (A-SET).
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4534, 5 ELEMENTS HAVE A TOTAL VIEW FACTOR (FA/A) LESS THAN 0.99, ENERGY MAY BE LOST TO SPACE.
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 1.132229E+03 1.132229E+03
7 S 1.132229E+03 1.132229E+03 7.732046E+02 7.732046E+02 7.732046E+02 7.732046E+02
13 S 9.168311E+02 9.168311E+02 9.168311E+02 9.168311E+02
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 24
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 25
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.217105E+05 2.217105E+05 2.217105E+05 2.217105E+05 .0 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 26
Main Index
CHAPTER 147
Main Index
148
Discussion
Example 5a involves four plates in radiative equilibrium which exhibit considerable energy loss
to space since there is no defined exchange mechanism between them and their environment.
This undefined environment behaves mathematically the same as blackbody space at a
temperature of absolute zero. A convenient method for introducing an ambient environment
into the problem capitalizes on the use of the ambient element as selected on the RADCAV Bulk
Data entry. For any group of surface elements we wish to consider as a partial enclosure, we can
define a single unique ambient element which will mathematically complete the enclosure. This
surface element must have a specified temperature boundary condition.
The ambient element concept relies on our knowledge that the individual elemental view factors
must add up to a value of 1.0 for a complete enclosure. Any elemental surfaces which have a
view factor sum of less than 1.0 as determined by the view module will automatically have the
remainder assigned to the ambient element. This environmental view factor is not listed in the
view module output, but is identified in the generated RADLST/RADMTX punch files. If the
ambient element is to model space, it should be made appropriately large relative to the other
elements in the enclosure. As discussed in “View Factor Calculation Methods” on page 409,
whenever an ambient element is requested for a cavity, a symmetric conservative radiation
matrix is generated.
The MSC.Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-33.
Main Index
CHAPTER 149
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 5b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,4,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,5,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,9,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,2.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,11,,2.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,12,,2.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,13,,1.5,0.0,-1.0
GRID,14,,1.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,15,,0.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,16,,0.5,0.0,-1.0
GRID,17,,0.0,100.0,0.0
GRID,18,,100.0,100.0,0.0
GRID,19,,100.0,100.0,100.0
GRID,20,,0.0,100.0,100.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
CQUAD4,2,5,5,6,7,8
CQUAD4,3,5,9,12,11,10
CQUAD4,4,5,13,14,15,16
CQUAD4,5,5,17,18,19,20
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
Main Index
150
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,5,6,7,8
CHBDYG,21,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG21
+CHG21,5,8,7,6
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,9,12,11,10
CHBDYG,40,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG40
+CHG40,13,14,15,16
CHBDYG,99,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG99
+CHG99,17,18,19,20
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADSET,65
RADCAV,65,99,YES
VIEW,55,65,KBSHD
VIEW,56,65,KSHD
VIEW,57,65,NONE
VIEW3D,65,,,,,,,3
$
SPC,10,1,,2000.0,2,,2000.0
SPC,10,3,,2000.0,4,,2000.0
SPC,10,17,,500.0,18,,500.0
SPC,10,19,,500.0,20,,500.0
TEMPD,20,2000.0
$
ENDDATA
Note: Ambient element EID = 99 is defined with a large area to represent space.
Results
The abbreviated EX5b.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-34. Note that the ambient element
does not appear in the view factor .f06 output. The punch file is shown in Listing 5-35, and does
include the ambient element.
Main Index
CHAPTER 151
*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 65 ***
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 1.141790E+03 1.141790E+03
7 S 1.141790E+03 1.141790E+03 8.044109E+02 8.044109E+02 8.044109E+02 8.044109E+02
13 S 9.356503E+02 9.356503E+02 9.356503E+02 9.356503E+02 5.000000E+02 5.000000E+02
19 S 5.000000E+02 5.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94 PAGE 11
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
19 S .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94 PAGE 12
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.208269E+05 2.208269E+05 2.208269E+05 2.208269E+05 .0 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0 -2.208285E+05 -2.208285E+05
19 S -2.208285E+05 -2.208285E+05
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94 PAGE 13
Main Index
CHAPTER 153
Discussion
The concept of multiple radiation cavities is investigated in this problem. The primary use of this
capability is to reduce the computation time associated with the identification and calculation of
view factors when total separation exists between regions. If defined as a single enclosure, this
problem would involve third body shadowing calculations, the most laborious and expensive
part of any view factor calculation. As a three cavity problem, these calculations are eliminated.
RADSET selects three cavities and the RADCAV entry for SHADOW is denoted as NO
indicating that no third body shadowing calculations are to be performed within the individual
cavities. The fields on the VIEW Bulk Data entry concerning SHADE are ignored when
SHADOW is set to NO on the RADCAV Bulk Data entry. When hundreds or thousands of
surfaces are involved, the savings may be crucial to the economics of the total analysis.
2000 °K
6 10 14
2
11 15
3 ~ 7
x
1 5 9 13
4 8 12 16
Main Index
154
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 5c
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,4,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,5,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,9,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,2.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,11,,2.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,12,,2.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,13,,3.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,14,,3.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,15,,3.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,16,,3.0,0.0,1.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
CQUAD4,2,5,5,6,7,8
CQUAD4,3,5,9,10,11,12
CQUAD4,4,5,13,16,15,14
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
Main Index
CHAPTER 155
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,5,8,7,6
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,5,6,7,8
CHBDYG,40,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG40
+CHG40,9,12,11,10
CHBDYG,50,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG50
+CHG50,9,10,11,12
CHBDYG,60,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG60
+CHG60,13,16,15,14
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADSET,65,75,85
RADCAV,65,,NO
RADCAV,75,,NO
RADCAV,85,,NO
VIEW,55,65
VIEW,56,75
VIEW,57,85
VIEW3D,65,,,,,,,3
VIEW3D,75,,,,,,,3
VIEW3D,85,,,,,,,3
$
SPC,10,1,,2000.0,2,,2000.0
SPC,10,3,,2000.0,4,,2000.0
TEMPD,20,2000.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
The abbreviated EX5c.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-37. The punch file is shown in
Listing 5-38. Note the multiple cavity information.
Main Index
156
*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 75 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
30 - 40 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
30 40 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
30 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
40 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 9
*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 85 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
50 - 60 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
50 60 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
50 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
60 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
^^^ DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE 9048 (NLSCSH) - LINEAR ELEMENTS ARE CONNECTED TO THE ANALYSIS SET (A-SET).
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4534, 2 ELEMENTS HAVE A TOTAL VIEW FACTOR (FA/A) LESS THAN 0.99, ENERGY MAY BE LOST TO SPACE.
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 1.127462E+03 1.127462E+03
7 S 1.127462E+03 1.127462E+03 6.371667E+02 6.371667E+02 6.371667E+02 6.371667E+02
13 S 4.260592E+02 4.260592E+02 4.260592E+02 4.260592E+02
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 43
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 44
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.221976E+05 2.221976E+05 2.221976E+05 2.221976E+05 .0 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 45
Main Index
CHAPTER 157
Main Index
158
Discussion
A forced convection element (CONVM) is available for the simulation of 1-D fluid flow
networks. The formulation takes into account conduction and convection in the streamwise
direction as well as the convection resistance between the fluid and the adjoining structure or
environment. The mass flow rate is specified by the value of the control node (CNTMDOT).
Fluid properties which vary with temperature are available through the MAT4/MATT4 entries
for conductivity, specific heat, and dynamic viscosity. In this example, the forced convection
2
heat transfer coefficient has been input at a constant value of 200. ⁄ m °C . For tube flow, the
heat transfer coefficient could easily have been calculated internally based on the relationships
available through the CONVM/PCONVM.
It may be desirable to consider a fluid flow problem in an evolutionary sense. This allows for a
much broader interpretation of load incrementing through time stepping, as well introducing
the stabilizing effects associated with heat capacitance and implicit time integration. The steady
state solution may then be likened to the long time solution from a transient analysis.
o
Tw = 0 C
o
T in = 100 C
T exit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5.0 m
K = o
.065 W ⁄ m C
C p = 4200. J ⁄ kg oC
ρ = 1000.kg ⁄ m 3
Main Index
CHAPTER 159
µ = 1.0 × 10 – 3 kg ⁄ m sec
h = 2 o
200. W ⁄ m C = constant
· = 0.1 kg ⁄ sec
m
DIA = .05 m
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 6
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,1.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,2.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,7,,3.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,8,,3.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,9,,4.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,4.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,11,,5.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
Main Index
160
·
Listing 5-39 Example 6 Input File, m = .10 (continued)
CHBDYP,10,25,FTUBE,,,1,2
CHBDYP,20,25,FTUBE,,,2,3
CHBDYP,30,25,FTUBE,,,3,4
CHBDYP,40,25,FTUBE,,,4,5
CHBDYP,50,25,FTUBE,,,5,6
CHBDYP,60,25,FTUBE,,,6,7
CHBDYP,70,25,FTUBE,,,7,8
CHBDYP,80,25,FTUBE,,,8,9
CHBDYP,90,25,FTUBE,,,9,10
CHBDYP,100,25,FTUBE,,,10,11
PHBDY,25,,0.05,0.05
$
CONVM,10,95,,50,99
CONVM,20,95,,50,99
CONVM,30,95,,50,99
CONVM,40,95,,50,99
CONVM,50,95,,50,99
CONVM,60,95,,50,99
CONVM,70,95,,50,99
CONVM,80,95,,50,99
CONVM,90,95,,50,99
CONVM,100,95,,50,99
$
PCONVM,95,15,0,1,200.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
MAT4,15,0.65,4200.0,1000.0,,1.0E-03
$
SPC,10,1,,100.0
SPC,10,99,,0.0
SPC,10,50,,0.1
$
TEMP,20,1,100.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMP,20,50,0.1
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
·
Note: The input file reflects a mass flow rate of m = .10 kg/sec.
Results
The abbreviated EX6.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-40. A plot of temperature versus mass
flow rate is shown in Figure 5-20.
Main Index
CHAPTER 161
·
Listing 5-40 Example 6 Results File, m = .10 Case
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.000000E+02 9.639484E+01 9.291965E+01 8.956976E+01 8.634062E+01 8.322791E+01
7 S 8.022740E+01 7.733508E+01 7.454703E+01 7.185950E+01 6.926884E+01
50 S 1.000000E-01
99 S .0
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
50 S .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 6 DECEMBER 3, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 2/93 PAGE 10
POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
50 S .0
99 S -1.338981E+04
EXAMPLE 6 DECEMBER 3, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 2/93 PAGE 11
Main Index
162
100
(0.40, 91.1) (0.50, 92.8)
90 (0.30, 88.3)
(0.45, 92.1)
(0.20, 83.1) (0.25, 86.2)
(0.35, 90.0)
80
(0.15, 78.2)
50
(0.05, 48.6)
40
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
·
m ( kg ⁄ sec )
Main Index
CHAPTER 163
Discussion
This example demonstrates the simplest of transient thermal responses. A single CHEXA
element at an initial temperature of 1000. °C is exposed to a free convection environment
maintained at 0.0 °C. Transient analysis involves the time-dependent storage as well as transport
of thermal energy. Therefore, relative to steady state analysis, the heat capacitance (storage)
must be accounted for as well as any time dependencies on loads and boundary conditions. A
starting point or initial condition is required and a solution duration is specified.
There are various techniques available for specifying temperature boundary conditions or
ambient node temperatures for transient analyses. If the temperature is to remain constant
throughout the analysis, an SPC should be used to set the boundary condition just as in steady
state analysis.
Fundamental MSC.Nastran X-Y plotting is demonstrated here for simple transient plots.
“Interface and File Communication” on page 31 discusses this capability in more detail.
The MSC.Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-41.
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7A
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
Main Index
164
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,1500,100.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,10.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,1000.0
$
ENDDATA
Note: TSTEPNL is identified in the Case Control Section, as are the NASPLT plot requests.
TSTEPNL provides the solution timing information in the Bulk Data Section.
MAT4 must have density and specific heat field data for transient analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 165
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-21. These plots were
examined by typing NASPLT EX7A.plt subsequent to the analysis. The EX7A.f06 file has large
lists of temperature vs. time for each grid point, and have been omitted here for the sake of
brevity.
Main Index
166
Discussion
The simple CHEXA element example is extended to illustrate convection with a time-varying
ambient temperature. In this case, the nonconstant temperature disallows the use of an SPC for
this specification. The transient form of the TEMPBC Bulk Data entry is demonstrated. The
TEMPBC is treated with the same methodology as a thermal load for transient analysis (see
Figure 5-22 for input schematic). Note the Case Control request for DLOAD = SID.
y
2 o
h = 100. W ⁄ m C
6 7
4 x
1
2 3
Main Index
CHAPTER 167
500.
T∞ ( t )
t ( sec )
CASE CONTROL
DLOAD = SID
“LOAD” SID
DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2
TABLEDi ID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4
Main Index
168
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7B
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/99(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,7500,1.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,100.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
Main Index
CHAPTER 169
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD1
+TBD1,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1.0,2000.0,1.0,3000.0,0.0,+TBD2
+TBD2,4000.0,0.0,ENDT
TEMPBC,300,TRAN,500.0,99
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of ambient temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-25. An
MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-26.
Main Index
170
Main Index
CHAPTER 171
Main Index
172
Discussion
As discussed in regard to steady state analysis (see “Thermal Loads” on page 12), internal heat
generation is considered to be a thermal load and as such is Case Control selectable. In a
transient analysis, this allows for using the time loading scheme illustrated in the previous
example (see Figure 5-24). This methodology can be applied to any SID selectable load.
2 o
h = 100. W ⁄ m C
y
HGEN = 10.
o
5 8 T ∞ = 0. C
o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0. C
6 7
x
1 4
2 3
10,000.
QVOL
3
(W ⁄ m )
1000. 2000.
t ( sec )
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7C
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,5900,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
Main Index
174
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,100.0,,10.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD1
+TBD1,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1.0,2000.0,0.0,3000.0,0.0,+TBD2
+TBD2,ENDT
QVOL,300,10000.0,,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-29.
Main Index
CHAPTER 175
Main Index
176
Discussion
There are a number of boundary conditions which are not defined as loads (“Thermal
Capabilities” on page 5) and as a result cannot be made time varying in the same fashion as
described in “Example 7c - Time Varying Loads” on page 172. In most cases, transient behavior
can be introduced into the boundary condition (convection or radiation) through specification
of a control node. The control node can be a simple free grid point, an SPOINT, or an active
degree of freedom in the system. In this example we drive the value of the control node explicitly
via TEMPBC and related TLOAD1 and TABLED1 statements to produce a free convection heat
transfer coefficient which varies with time. We also demonstrate the use of the DLOAD
statement in the Bulk Data for applying more than one TLOADi in the same analysis.
y o
h = 1000. W ⁄ m 2 C
o
T ∞ = 0. C (grid point 99)
Q 0 = 6. ⋅ (50,000.) W
o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0. C
5
8
6 7
x
1 4
2 3
Main Index
CHAPTER 177
1.0
U CN
0.0
1000. 2000.
t ( sec )
Figure 5-31 Control Node (Grid Point 50) for Free Convection Boundary Condition
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7D
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 50 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 50 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/50(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,490,10.0,,,,U
$
Main Index
178
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,1000.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,50,99
CONV,20,35,,50,99
CONV,30,35,,50,99
CONV,40,35,,50,99
CONV,50,35,,50,99
CONV,60,35,,50,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
DLOAD,200,1.0,1.0,300,1.0,400
$
TLOAD1,300,500,,,700
TABLED1,700,,,,,,,,+TBD700
+TBD700,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
QBDY3,500,50000.0,,10,THRU,60,BY,10
$
TLOAD1,400,600,,,800
TABLED1,800,,,,,,,,+TBD800
+TBD800,0.0,0.0,1000.0,0.0,2000.0,1.0,5000.0,1.0,+TBD801
+TBD801,ENDT
TEMPBC,600,TRAN,1.0,50
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
CHAPTER 179
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of the control node, grid point 50, temperature versus time is shown
in Figure 5-32. An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid point 1 temperature versus time is shown in
Figure 5-33.
Main Index
180
Main Index
CHAPTER 181
Discussion
The extension of the temperature dependent free convection heat transfer coefficient is
demonstrated for transient analysis. The user specification of this capability is treated the same
as in the steady state case, but due to the evolutionary nature of the transient problem, the heat
transfer coefficient becomes an implicit function of time.
o o
h ( T ) = 0. W ⁄ m 2 C ( T ≤ 100. C )
o o o
h ( T ) = 10. ⋅ T – 1000. W ⁄ m 2 C ( 100. C > T > 200. C )
o o
h ( T ) = 1000. W ⁄ m 2 C ( T ≥ 200. C )
o
y T ∞ = 0. C (grid point 99)
Q 0 = 6. ⋅ (50,000.) W
o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0. C
5
8
6 7
x
1 4
2 3
Main Index
182
1000.
h( T)
o
( W ⁄ m2 C )
100. 200.
o
T ( C)
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7E
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 300
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,390,10.0,1
$
Main Index
CHAPTER 183
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,1000.0
MATT4,15,,,,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM1
+TBM1,0.0,0.0,100.0,0.0,200.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,+TBM2
+TBM2,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
TLOAD1,300,500,,,700
TABLED1,700,,,,,,,,+TBD700
+TBD700,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
QBDY3,500,50000.0,,10,THRU,60,BY,10
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-36.
Main Index
184
Main Index
CHAPTER 185
Discussion
Latent heat effects can be captured by specifying phase change material properties on the MAT4
Bulk Data entry. The information required includes the latent heat and a finite temperature
range over which the phase change is to occur. For pure materials, this range can physically be
quite small whereas for solutions or alloys the range can be quite large. Numerically, the wider
the range the better. It is not recommended to make this range less than a few degrees.
Phase change involves the release of considerable amounts of heat while the temperature
remains nearly constant. In this case, it is beneficial to consider the change in enthalpy as
illustrated in Figure 5-37. The calculated enthalpies are available with the use of DIAG 50, 51,
or by the Case Control command ENTHALPY = ALL. The solution sequence for the phase
change specific algorithm is discussed in “Method of Solution” on page 57.
In the cases that follow, the first variation illustrates freezing. Variation 2 demonstrates melting.
Main Index
186
o
y h = 100. W ⁄ m 2 C
QLAT = 3.34 × 10 5 J ⁄ kg
o
TCH = 0. C
o
TDELTA = 2. C
5 o
8 T ∞ = – 20. C
o
T element ( t = 0 ) = – 20. C
6 7
x
1 4
2 3
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
DIAG 51
TIME 10
CEND
$
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7F1
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
ENTHALPY = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
Main Index
CHAPTER 187
Note: NDAMP provides numerical damping for the phase change phenomenon.
Main Index
188
Results - Variation 1
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-38.
Main Index
CHAPTER 189
Variation 2
o
h = 100. W ⁄ m 2 C
y
QLAT = 3.34 × 10 5 J ⁄ kg
o
TCH = 0. C
o
TDELTA = 2. C
o
5 T ∞ = – 20. C
8
o
T element ( t = 0 ) = 20. C
6 7
x
1 4
2 3
Main Index
190
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
DIAG 51
TIME 10
CEND
$
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7F2
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
Main Index
CHAPTER 191
Main Index
192
Results - Variation 2
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-40.
Main Index
CHAPTER 193
Discussion
A radiative equilibrium analysis is used to demonstrate different methods of temperature
specification for transient analyses. As discussed in “Thermal Capabilities” on page 5, an SPC
is used when the temperature is to remain constant for the duration of the analysis (Variation 1).
When the temperature is to vary during the analysis, two methods are available. A TEMPBC of
type TRAN, or a CELASi with applied SLOAD can be used.
When a TEMPBC is implemented (Variation 2), a thermal conductivity matrix element of
magnitude of 1.0E+10 is imposed internally in the form of a penalty method. For many problems
this will be adequate for maintaining the grid point temperature while facilitating convergence.
In some cases, however, the size of this conductance can be overwhelming with respect to those
of the rest of the model. In such a case, it may be difficult to satisfy the convergence criteria due
to the dominance of one matrix conductance value.
The alternative approach to this problem is to use a CELASi element and specify a consistent
conductance or stiffness value for the model in question (Variation 3). The QHBDY power level
can be adjusted to maintain the desired temperature.
o
RADBC T ∞ = 300 C
o
QHBDY T element ( t = 0 ) = 0 K
Q 0 = 10,000. W ⁄ m 2
Area = 1.0 m 2
ε = α = 1.0
m = 10. kg
Main Index
194
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 8A
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
TSTEPNL,100,1500,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CDAMP5,1,5,1
PDAMP5,5,15,10.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,POINT,,,1,,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,1.0
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD400
+TBD400,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
QHBDY,300,POINT,10000.0,1.0,1
$
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMP,20,99,300.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
CHAPTER 195
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-42.
Main Index
196
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 8B
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 700
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
TSTEPNL,100,1500,1.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CDAMP5,1,5,1
PDAMP5,5,15,10.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,POINT,,,1,,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,1.0
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
DLOAD,700,1.0,1.0,200,1.0,500
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD400
+TBD400,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
QHBDY,300,POINT,10000.0,1.0,1
$
TLOAD1,500,600,,,400
TEMPBC,600,TRAN,300.0,99
TEMP,20,99,300.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
CHAPTER 197
Main Index
198
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 8C
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 700
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
TSTEPNL,100,1500,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CDAMP5,1,5,1
PDAMP5,5,15,10.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,POINT,,,1,,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,1.0
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
DLOAD,700,1.0,1.0,200,1.0,500
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD400
+TBD400,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
QHBDY,300,POINT,10000.0,1.0,1
$
TLOAD1,500,600,,,400
CELAS2,999,1.0E5,99,1
SLOAD,600,99,300.0E5
TEMP,20,99,300.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
CHAPTER 199
Main Index
200
Discussion
A diurnal heat transfer analysis is performed over a two day cycle. The TLOAD2 Bulk Data
entry is used to specify the load function (QVECT) in convenient sinusoidal format. A radiation
boundary condition provides the heat loss mechanism to an ambient environment at 300
degrees. In Example 9a, the absorptivity and emissivity are constant and the loading is a
function of time based on the load magnitude which reflects a projected area without treating
the QVECT as a vector load.
In “Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles” on page 204, the variation of absorptivity with
respect to time is added to the problem.
QVECT
( W ⁄ m2 ) 0 21,600 43,200 64,800 86,400 108,000 129,600 151,200 172,800 t ( sec )
Day 1 Day 2
Day 1 Day 2
Sunrise t=0 t = 86,400
Noon t = 21,600 t = 108,000
Sunset t = 43,200 t = 129,600
Night 43,200 < t < 86,400 129,600 < t < 172,800
2
• Solar flux magnitude varies sinusoidally with an amplitude of 750.0 W ⁄ m , and a
period of one day.
• CHBDYG 10 absorbs heat for the first day.
• CHBDYG 20 absorbs heat for the second day.
• CHBDYG 30 radiates heat both days.
Example 9b only:
• Grid 50 is the control node on the QVECT entry. It is forced to vary with time as
absorptivity (a) varies with the “attack” angle of the sun, i.e.,
U CNTRLND α(θ )
t θ
• So the value of U CNTRLND equals α ( θ ) at any given time (or any given angle:
o o
180 → 12 hr = 43,200 sec, 1 → 240 sec ).
• Absorptivity is set to 1.0 on the RADM card so that U CNTRLND will act as absorptivity:
P in = α [ e ( t ) ⋅ n ] F ( t – τ ) Q 0 U CNTRLND
{
1.0 α(θ )
P in = α [ e ( t ) ⋅ n ] F ( t – τ ) Q 0 α ( θ )
• Ex9a. - α = constant
• Ex9b. - α = f ( θ )
The MSC.Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-51.
Main Index
202
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 9A
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = PLATE TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = PLATE TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
TSTEPNL,100,1728,100.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.005
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,4,3,2,1
$
DLOAD,200,1.0,1.0,300,1.0,400
TLOAD2,300,1000,,,0.0,43200.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD300
+TLD300,0.0,0.0
TLOAD2,400,2000,,,86400.0,129600.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD400
+TLD400,0.0,0.0
QVECT,1000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,,+QVCT1
+QVCT1,10
Main Index
CHAPTER 203
QVECT,2000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,,+QVCT2
+QVCT2,20
RADM,45,0.6,0.6
RADBC,99,1.0,,30
$
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,300.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of plate temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-46.
Main Index
204
Discussion
The loading pattern is substantially unchanged from the previous example; however, the effect
of variation of surface absorptivity with angle of incident solar radiation is taken into account
implicitly via the control node. As in the previous example, we provide independent CHBDY
surface elements for each load and boundary condition specification resulting in a total of three
surface elements attached to the conduction element. This can sometimes be convenient for
postprocessing if we wish to isolate applied load segments of the same type.
The MSC.Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-52.
Main Index
CHAPTER 205
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 9B
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = PLATE TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = PLATE TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS--THETA, DEGREES -- (1.0 DEGREE = 240.0 SECONDS)
YTITLE = ABSORPTIVITY
TCURVE = ABSORPTIVITY VS. TIME--THETA
XYPLOT TEMP/50(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS--THETA, DEGREES -- (1.0 DEGREE = 240.0 SECONDS)
YTITLE = ABSORPTIVITY
TCURVE = ABSORPTIVITY VS. TIME--THETA
XMIN = 21600.0
XMAX = 43200.0
XYPLOT TEMP/50(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
TSTEPNL,100,1728,100.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.005
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0
RADM,45,1.0,0.6
RADM,46,0.6,0.6
$
Main Index
206
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,,,46,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,4,3,2,1
DLOAD,200,1.0,1.0,300,1.0,400,1.0,500
TLOAD2,300,1000,,,0.0,43200.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD300
+TLD300,0.0,0.0
TLOAD2,400,2000,,,86400.0,129600.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD400
+TLD400,0.0,0.0
QVECT,1000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,50,+QVCT1
+QVCT1,10
QVECT,2000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,50,+QVCT2
+QVCT2,20
RADBC,99,1.0,,30
$
TLOAD1,500,600,,,700
TABLED1,700,,,,,,,,+TBD1
+TBD1,0.0,0.15,2400.0,0.50,3600.0,0.60,4800.0,0.55,+TBD2
+TBD2,7200.0,0.375,9600.0,0.275,12000.0,0.225,14400.0,0.20,+TBD3
+TBD3,16800.0,0.16,19200.0,0.15,21600.0,0.15,24000.0,0.15,+TBD4
+TBD4,26400.0,0.16,28800.0,0.20,31200.0,0.225,33600.0,0.275,+TBD5
+TBD5,36000.0,0.375,38400.0,0.55,39600.0,0.60,40800.0,0.50,+TBD6
+TBD6,43200.0,0.15,86400.0,0.15,88800.0,0.50,90000.0,0.60,+TBD7
+TBD7,91200.0,0.55,93600.0,0.375,96000.0,0.275,98400.0,0.225,+TBD8
+TBD8,100800.0,0.20,103200.0,0.16,105600.0,0.15,108000.0,0.15,+TBD9
+TBD9,110400.0,0.15,112800.0,0.16,115200.0,0.20,117600.0,0.225,+TBD10
+TBD10,120000.0,0.275,122400.0,0.375,124800.0,0.55,126000.0,0.60,+TBD11
+TBD11,127200.0,0.50,129600.0,0.15,172800.0,0.15,ENDT
TEMPBC,600,TRAN,1.0,50
$
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMP,20,50,0.15
TEMPD,20,300.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
MSC.Nastran X-Y plots showing absorptivity versus time are shown in Figure 5-47 and
Figure 5-48. Plate temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-49.
Main Index
CHAPTER 207
QVECT
n̂
Main Index
208
α ( θ ) = 0.15 α ( θ ) = 0.15
= constant = constant
Main Index
CHAPTER 209
Main Index
210
Discussion
A thermostat is modeled using the nonlinear transient forcing function (NOLIN3) as a heating
element and the multi-point constraint (MPC) relationship to provide the thermostat
connections. One end of the rod element structure has the thermocouple attached to it and is
subject to convective losses to the ambient environment at 0.0 °C . When this local temperature
drops below 100.0 °C , heating occurs at the opposite end of the structure at a constant rate.
Conversely, when the thermocouple temperature exceeds 100.0 °C , the heat load is removed.
There is an inherent delay in this system associated with the distance between the thermocouple
and the point of application of the heat load as well as the delay generated as a result of the
thermal diffusivity of the material.
P IN ( t ) T ∞ = 0.0
h = 200.
(NOLIN3) 1 2 3 4 5 6
MPC
o
T 0 = 110
(Initial Condition)
– T 50 + 100. ⋅ T 51 – T 6 = 0
50,000. , T 50 > 0
P IN ( t ) = Let T 51 = 1.0
0.0 , T 50 ≤ 0
T 50 = – 1.0 ( – 100. + T 6 )
Main Index
CHAPTER 211
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 10
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
MPC = 30
TSTEPNL = 100
NONLINEAR = 300
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 6 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 6 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/6(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,30000,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,51,,51.0,51.0,51.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,1.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,200.0
$
CHBDYE,60,5,3
$
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
NOLIN3,300,1,,50000.0,50,1,0.0
Main Index
212
SPC,10,51,,1.0
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,51,1.0
$
MPC,30,6,,-1.0,50,,-1.0,,+MPC
+MPC,,51,,100.0
$
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMP,20,50,-10.0
TEMPD,20,110.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
An MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-52. An
MSC.Nastran X-Y plot of grid 6 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-53.
Main Index
CHAPTER 213
Main Index
214
Discussion
It may be desirable to consider fluid flow problems from a transient view point. In particular,
fluid loops when used in conjunction with the thermostat control described in “Example 10 -
Thermostat Control” on page 210 are most useful in transient analysis. Accurate temporal
response requires some user control be exerted over the Courant Number as discussed in
“Thermal Capabilities” on page 5.
In some cases, where steady state convergence is difficult or impossible to achieve, it may prove
beneficial to let the transient system evolve toward its long time solution, thereby achieving the
steady state equivalent. The transient analysis has inherent damping associated with the heat
capacitance and can also utilize numerical damping through the NDAMP parameter.
Additionally, loading patterns can be applied gradually with respect to time in an ad hoc load
incrementing scheme which may prove more flexible than the load incrementing which is
available in the steady state solution sequence.
ρ ∼ 1000. kg ⁄ m 3
kg
µ ∼ 10 – 3 -------------------
m ⋅ sec
·
m ∼ kg ⁄ sec
l∼m
ν ∼ m ⁄ sec
o
h ∼ W ⁄ m2 C
o o
k ∼ W ⁄ m C ( .65 W ⁄ m C )
Dνρ m ⋅ m ⁄ sec ⋅ kg ⁄ m 3
Re = ----------- ⇒ -------------------------------------------------------- ⇒ NONDIMENSIONAL
µ kg ⁄ m sec
Main Index
CHAPTER 215
·
m = ρνA ⇒ kg ⁄ m 3 ⋅ m ⁄ sec ⋅ m 2 ⇒ kg ⁄ s
Cp µ o
J ⁄ kg C ⋅ kg ⁄ m sec
Pr = ---------- ⇒ ----------------------------------------------------------- ⇒ NONDIMENSIONAL
k o
W⁄m C
2 o
hx W⁄m C⋅m
u = ------ ⇒ ---------------------------------------- ⇒ NONDIMENSIONAL
k o
W⁄m C
o
T wall = 0 C
o T exit
T in = 100 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
·
L = 1.0 m, D = 0.01 m, m = 0.1 kg ⁄ sec
K n = 0.4 (heating of fluid)
H = 0.023 ---- Re 0.8 Pr n
D
n = 0.3 (cooling of fluid)
Main Index
216
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 11
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC =20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = EXIT TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = EXIT TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/11(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,400,0.005,1,,,,U,+TSTP
+TSTP,0.05
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,7,,0.6,0.0,0.0
GRID,8,,0.7,0.0,0.0
GRID,9,,0.8,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,0.9,0.0,0.0
GRID,11,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,FTUBE,,,1,2
CHBDYP,20,25,FTUBE,,,2,3
CHBDYP,30,25,FTUBE,,,3,4
CHBDYP,40,25,FTUBE,,,4,5
CHBDYP,50,25,FTUBE,,,5,6
CHBDYP,60,25,FTUBE,,,6,7
CHBDYP,70,25,FTUBE,,,7,8
CHBDYP,80,25,FTUBE,,,8,9
CHBDYP,90,25,FTUBE,,,9,10
CHBDYP,100,25,FTUBE,,,10,11
PHBDY,25,,0.01,0.01
$
CONVM,10,35,,50,99
CONVM,20,35,,50,99
CONVM,30,35,,50,99
Main Index
CHAPTER 217
CONVM,40,35,,50,99
CONVM,50,35,,50,99
CONVM,60,35,,50,99
CONVM,70,35,,50,99
CONVM,80,35,,50,99
CONVM,90,35,,50,99
CONVM,100,35,,50,99
PCONVM,35,15,1,1,0.023,0.8,0.4,0.3
MAT4,15,0.673,4195.0,970.2,,8.6E-4
$
SPC,10,1,,100.0
SPC,10,50,,0.1
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,1,100.0
TEMP,20,50,0.1
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA
Results
Temperature versus distance is shown in Figure 5-54. Exit temperature versus time is shown in
Figure 5-55. Exit temperature versus mass flow rate is shown in Figure 5-56.
Main Index
218
100
(0.0, 100.)
(0.1, 95.3)
(0.2, 90.8)
90
(0.3, 86.6)
(0.4, 82.5)
80 (0.5, 78.6)
T
o
(0.6, 75.0)
( C)
(0.7, 71.4)
70
(0.8, 68.1)
(0.9, 64.9)
60 (1.0, 61.8)
50
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Distance (meters)
Main Index
CHAPTER 219
Main Index
220
80
(1.3, 74.8)
75 (1.1, 74.1)
(0.9, 73.2) (1.2, 74.4)
(0.7, 72.0) (1.0, 73.7)
(0.8, 72.6)
(0.5, 70.4) (0.6, 71.3)
70
(0.3, 67.9) (0.4, 69.3)
T exit
o
( C)
65 (0.2, 65.7)
(0.1, 61.8)
60 (0.075, 60.2)
(0.05, 58.2)
55
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
·
m ( kg ⁄ sec )
Main Index
CHAPTER 221
Discussion
Thermal loads (QVOL, QVECT, QBDY3) can be thermostatically controlled by including a
CONTRLT Bulk Data entry in the model. A schematic of the process is given in Figure 5-57.
PL
PH T Sensor
Switch Status = On
Figure 5-57
This capability provides thermal control for heating elements with these features:
1. Sensor temperature can be measured from any GRID or scalar point in the model.
2. Numerous switch formats are available with user-defined deadbands.
3. The sensor (thermacouple) can be continuously monitored or it can be evaluated at a
user-defined sampling rate starting from TIME = 0.0 When the sensor is sampled, the
control logic is evaluated and any necessary control action is enforced.
4. The control device can account for physical actuator time delay and rise and decay time
constants.
Main Index
222
5. Automatic time stepping is handled internaly giving priority to any controller action
which is in effect. Outside of the control action regions, the time steps size reverts back
to the time step size, DT, specified by the user on the TSTEPNL statement. The standard
nonlinear time-step adjustment algorithm is not implemented for control logic
analysis.
h, T ∞
Figure 5-58
ρ ⋅ Vol ⋅ C p = 6000. J ⁄ °C
QVOL = 12000. W
T(o) = 0.0 °C
h⋅A = 100.0 W ⁄ °C
T∞ = 0.0 °C
PL = 80.0 °C
PH = 100.0 °C
h⋅A 1 1
B = ------------------------------- = ------ -----------
ρ ⋅ Vol ⋅ C p 60 sec
– Bt
T(t) = 120. ⋅ ( 1 – e )
T ( 107.5 ) = 100.0 °C
Input
Main Index
CHAPTER 223
Discussion
A study is performed to examine the effects of multiple radiation shields for maintaining a
cryogenic environment. The number of cylindrical layers of material as well as the surface
emissivities are varied and the total heat flow for each variation is recovered.
The radiation exchange can be modeled in several ways. If each radiation gap is treated as an
individual cavity, then the minimum number of view factor calculations will be performed. In
this case, the surface exchange elements should be designated as can shade for the element on
the inner radius and can be shaded for the element on the outer radius. These designations are
made on the shade field on the VIEW Bulk Data entry. For axisymmetric view factor
calculations, it will often be difficult to set the shadowing flags correctly. The user may find it
easier to make shade = both in these instances and pay a penalty in CPUs.
If a multiple cavity approach is used, then there will be a RADLST and RADMTX for each cavity.
Using a single cavity approach, all the radiation surface elements are entered on a single
RADLST, and the VIEW3D routine automatically sorts out those that can see each other and
determines the magnitude of the axisymmetric view factors between each active pair. The
accuracy of the axisymmetric view factors can be controlled in several ways. The process used
in MSC.Nastran relies on internally creating a semi-circle of computational elements and
applying symmetry arguments in forming the view factor between REV type surface elements.
This is described in greater detail in Appendix . Since the core or component view factors are
computed using the generalized 3D methods (Gaussian/contour integrations with error
corrections), similar modeling principles apply. A good model will select NCOMP (field 9 on
RADCAV) to generate elements that are approximately square.
The model represents az-slice of a container configuration, however, nothing special has been
included in the model to prevent the exchange surfaces from communicating with the external
environment. This can be controlled by setting the MTXTYP = 4 on the RADLST Bulk Data entry.
The flow of heat is then purely radial with no exchange with space.
Main Index
224
1.0 .25 T o, h o
k
n̂ n̂ n̂ n̂
Ti n̂ .50
n = 1 n = 2 . . .
Dimensions in Centimeters
Ti = 77°k
T o = 293°k
2
ho = 10.0 w ⁄ m °k
2
k = .01 w ⁄ m k
∈ = .1, .5, .9
n = 1, 2, 3, 4
Results
View Factor Calculation:
Main Index
CHAPTER 225
Main Index
226
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Nomenclature for Thermal Analysis
A
■ Commonly Used Terms
Main Index
228
k Thermal conductivity
ρ Density
Cp Specific heat
υ Kinematic viscosity
Nu Nusselt’s number
Re Reynolds’ number
Pr Prandtl’s number
Gr Grashof’s number
β Volume coefficient of expansion
q Heat flux
Q Heat flow
T, u Temperature
g Acceleration due to gravity
Tw Wall temperature
T∞ Ambient temperature
σ Stefan-Boltzmann constant
F ij View factor
t Time
ε Emissivity
α Absorptivity
· Mass flow rate
m
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Executive Control Section
B
■ Frequently Used Executive Control Statements
Main Index
230
Main Index
CHAPTER B 231
Executive Control Section
Main Index
232
Describer Meaning
ki A list separated by commas and/or spaces of desired diagnostics.
Remarks:
1. The DIAG statement is optional.
2. Multiple DIAG statements are allowed.
3. The following table lists the possible values for ki and their corresponding actions:
Main Index
234
k=30 In link 1, punches the XSEMii data (i.e., set ii via DIAG 1 through
15). The Bulk Data and Case Control Sections are ignored, and no
analysis is performed. After link 1, this turns on BUG output. Used
also by MATPRN module. See also Remark 5 on the “TSTEP” on
page 2137 Bulk Data entry.
k=31 Prints link specification table and module properties list (MPL)
data. The Bulk Data and Case Control Sections are ignored, and no
analysis is performed.
k=32 Prints diagnostics for XSTORE and PVA expansion.
k=33 Not used.
k=34 Turns off plot line optimization.
k=35 Prints diagnostics for 3-D slideline contact analysis in SOLs 106 and
129.
k=36 Prints extensive tables generated by the GP0 module in p-version
analysis.
k=37 Disables the superelement congruence test option and ignores User
Fatal Messages 4277 and 4278. A better alternative is available with
PARAMeter CONFAC. See “Parameters” on page 601.
k=38 Prints material angles for CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, and
CTRIA6 elements. The angle is printed only for elements that
specify MCID in field 8 of the connection entry.
k=39 Traces module FA1 operations and aerodynamic splining in SOLs
145 and 146.
k=40 Print constraint override/average information for edges and faces
in p-adaptive analysis
k=41 Traces GINO OPEN/CLOSE operations.
k=42 Not used.
k=43 Not used.
k=44 Prints a mini-dump for fatal errors and suppresses user message
exit.
k=45 Prints the same database directory information as DIAG 2 except
that it prints only after each DMAP statement.
k=46 Used by MSC development for GINO printout.
k=47 Prints DBMGR, DBFETCH, and DBSTORE subDMAP diagnostics.
k=48 Used by MSC development for GINO printout.
k=49 DIAG 49 is obsolete and should not be used. The utility f04rprt
should be used to summarize the f04 Execution Summary instead..
Main Index
CHAPTER B 235
Executive Control Section
k=50 Traces the nonlinear solution in SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159. Prints
subcase status; echoes NLPARM, NLPCI, and TSTEPNL entry
fields; and prints initial arc-length. Prints iteration summary only
in SOLs 129, and 159.
In static aeroelastic analysis (SOL 144), prints transformation
information associated with the generation of the DJX matrix in the
ADG module and intermediate solutions information in the ASG
module.
k=51 Prints intermediate displacement, load error vectors, and
additional iteration information helpful to debugging in SOLs 106,
129, 153, and 159.
k=52 Disables the printing of errors at each time step in SOLs 129 and
159.
k=53 MESSAGE module output will also be printed in the execution
summary table. See the “Output Description” on page 373 of the
MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
k=54 Linker debug print.
k=55 Performance timing.
k=56 Extended print of Execution Summary table (prints all DMAP
statements and RESTART deletions). See the “Output
Description” on page 373 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
k=57 Executive table (XDIRLD) performance timing and last-time-used
(LTU) diagnostics.
k=58 Data block deletion debug and timing constants echo.
k=59 Buffpool debug printout.
k=60 Prints diagnostics for data block cleanup at the end of each module
execution in subroutines DBCLN, DBEADD, and DBERPL.
k=61 GINO block allocator diagnostics.
k=62 GINO block manager diagnostics.
k=63 Prints each item checked by the RESTART module and its NDDL
description.
k=64 Requests upward compatibility DMAP conversion from
Version 65 only. Ignored in Version 70.5 and later systems.
Examples:
DIAG 8,53
or
DIAG 8
DIAG 53
Main Index
236
Remarks:
1. The ECHO statement is optional.
2. ECHOOFF suppresses the echo of subsequent Executive Control statements.
ECHOON reactivates the echo after an ECHOOFF statement.
Main Index
CHAPTER B 237
Executive Control Section
ID Comment
Specifies a comment.
Format:
ID [=] i1, i2
Describer Meaning
i1, i2 Character strings (1 to 8 characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic).
Remark:
1. The ID statement is optional and not used by the program.
Main Index
238
n
SOL [ SOLIN = obj-DBset NOEXE ]
subDMAP-name
Describer Meaning
n Solution number. See Remark 6. for the list of valid numbers.
(Integer>0)
subDMAP-name The name of a main subDMAP. See the MSC.Nastran 2005 DMAP
Programmer’s Guide. (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length
and the first character must be alphabetic.)
obj-DBset The character name of a DBset where the OSCAR is stored. See Remarks
1. and 2. (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the
first character must be alphabetic.)
NOEXE Suppresses execution after compilation and/or linkage of the solution is
complete. Also, the Bulk Data and Case Control Sections are not read or
processed.
Remarks:
1. If SOLIN keyword is not given and if there are no LINK statements within the input
data, the program will perform an automatic link. The program will first collect the
objects created in the current run by the COMPILE statement and the remaining objects
stored in the MSCOBJ DBset. The program will then perform an automatic link of the
collected objects.
2. If the SOLIN keyword is not given but a LINK statement is provided, the SOLIN
default will be obtained from the SOLOUT keyword on the LINK statement.
3. The OSCAR (Operation Sequence Control ARray) defines the problem solution
sequence. The OSCAR consists of a sequence of entries with each entry containing all
of the information needed to execute one step of the problem solution. The OSCAR is
generated from information supplied by the user’s entries in the Executive Control
Section.
4. The SOLIN keyword will skip the automatic link and execute the OSCAR on the
specified DBset.
5. The DOMAINSOLVER may be used in conjunction with Solution Sequences 101, 103,
108, and 111 to select domain decomposition solution methods.
6. The following Solution Sequences are currently available in MSC.Nastran:
Main Index
CHAPTER B 239
Executive Control Section
SOL
SOL Name Description
Number
101 SESTATIC Statics with Options:
Linear Steady State Heat Transfer
Alternate Reduction
Inertia Relief
Design Sensitivity - Statics
103 SEMODES Normal Modes with Option:
Design Sensitivity - Modes
105 SEBUCKL Buckling with options:
Static Analysis
Alternate Reduction
Inertia Relief
Design Sensitivity - Buckling
106 NLSTATIC Nonlinear or Linear Statics
107 SEDCEIG Direct Complex Eigenvalues
108 SEDFREQ Direct Frequency Response
109 SEDTRAN Direct Transient Response
110 SEMCEIG Modal Complex Eigenvalues
111 SEMFREQ Modal Frequency Response
112 SEMTRAN Modal Transient Response
114 CYCSTATX Cyclic Statics with Option:
Alternate Reduction
115 CYCMODE Cyclic Normal Modes
116 CYCBUCKL Cyclic Buckling
118 CYCFREQ Cyclic Direct Frequency Response
129 NLTRAN Nonlinear or Linear Transient Response
144 AESTAT Static Aeroelastic Response
145 SEFLUTTR Aerodynamic Flutter
146 SEAERO Aeroelastic Response
153 NLSCSH Static Structural and/or Steady State Heat Transfer
Analysis with Options:
Linear or Nonlinear Analysis
159 NLTCSH Transient Structural and/or Transient Heat Transfer
Analysis with Options:
Linear or Nonlinear Analysis
Main Index
240
SOL
SOL Name Description
Number
190 DBTRANS Database Transfer, “Output Description” on page 373
of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
200 DESOPT Design Optimization
SOL SOL
Description
Number Name
1 STATICS1 Statics and Linear Heat Transfer
3 MODES Normal Modes
4 GNOLIN Geometric Nonlinear
5 BUCKLING Buckling
7 DCEIG Direct Complex Eigenvalues
8 DFREQ Direct Frequency Response
9 DTRAN Direct Transient Response
10 MCEIG Modal Complex Eigenvalues
11 MFREQ Modal Frequency Response
12 MTRAN Modal Transient Response
14 CYCSTAT Cyclic Statics
15 CYCMODES Cyclic Modes
16 CYCBUCK Cyclic Buckling
Examples:
1. In the following example, SOL 103 is executed from MSCOBJ.
SOL 103
2. In the following example, the PHASE0 subDMAP is altered, SOL 103 is relinked onto
the OBJSCR DBset (which is the default for SOLOUT), and SOL 103 is executed.
SOL 103
COMPILE PHASE1
ALTER ’DTIIN’
TABPT SETREE,,,,// $
.
.
.
ENDALTER $
Main Index
CHAPTER B 241
Executive Control Section
3. In the following example, the solution sequence called DYNAMICS is executed from
the USROBJ DBset.
SOL DYNAMICS SOLIN = USROBJ
Main Index
242
TIME
Sets the maximum CPU and I/O time.
Format:
TIME[=]t1[,t2]
Describer Meaning
t1 Maximum allowable execution time in CPU minutes. (Real or Integer>0;
Default=1.89E9 seconds)
t2 Maximum allowable I/O limit in minutes. (Real or Integer>0; Default is
infinity, which is machine dependent.)
Remarks:
1. The TIME statement is optional.
2. If t2 is specified then t1 must be specified.
Examples:
1. The following example designates a runtime of 8 hours:
TIME 480
2. The following example designates 90 seconds:
TIME 1.5
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Case Control Commands
C
■ Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands
Main Index
244
Main Index
CHAPTER C 245
Case Control Commands
$ Comment
Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere
within the input file.
Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.
Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE
Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.
Main Index
246
Specifies the type of analysis being performed for the current subcase.
Format:
ANALYSIS=type
Examples:
ANALYSIS=STATICS
ANALYSIS=MODES
Describer Meaning
type Analysis type. Allowable values and applicable solution sequences
(Character):
STATICS Statics
MODES Normal Modes also in
SOL 110, 111, 112
BUCK Buckling
DFREQ Direct Frequency
MFREQ Modal Frequency
MTRAN Modal Transient
DCEIG Direct Complex (SOL 200 only)
Eigenvalue Analysis
MCEIG Modal Complex
Eigenvalue Analysis
SAERO Static Aeroelasticity
DIVERGE Static Aeroelastic
Divergence
FLUTTER Flutter
HEAT Heat Transfer Analysis
(SOLs 153 and 159 only)
STRUCTURE Structural Analysis
Remarks:
1. ANALYSIS=STRUC is the default in SOLs 153 and 159.
2. In SOL 200, all subcases, including superelement subcases, must be assigned by
an ANALYSIS command either in the subcase or above all subcases. Also, all
subcases assigned by ANALYSIS=MODES must contain a DESSUB.
3. ANALYSIS=DIVERG is only available for analysis in SOL 200. Sensitivity and
optimization are not supported for this analysis type.
4. In order to obtain normal modes data recovery in SOLs 110, 111, and 112,
ANALYSIS = MODES must be specified under one or more separate subcases(s)
which contain requests for data recovery intended for normal modes only. For
example, in SOL 111:
Main Index
CHAPTER C 247
Case Control Commands
METH=40
SPC=1
SUBCASE 1 $ Normal Modes
ANALYSIS=MODES
DISP=ALL
SUBCASE 2 $ Frequency response
STRESS=ALL
DLOAD=12
FREQ=4
All commands which control the boundary conditions (SPC, MPC, and SUPORT)
and METHOD selection should be copied inside the ANALYSIS=MODES
subcase or specified above the subcase level.
Main Index
248
Example:
DLOAD=73
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a DLOAD, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2,
or ACSRCE Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. RLOAD1 and RLOAD2 may only be selected in a frequency response problem.
2. TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 may be selected in a transient or frequency response
problem.
3. Either a RLOADi or TLOADi entry (but not both) must be selected in an
aeroelastic response problem. If RLOADi is selected, a frequency response is
calculated. If TLOADi is selected, then transient response is computed by Fourier
transform. When there are only gust loads (GUST entry), the DLOAD selects a
TLOADi or RLOADi entry with zero load along with field 3 of the GUST
command.
4. The DLOAD command will be ignored if specified for upstream superelements
in dynamic analysis. To apply loads to upstream superelements, please see the
LOADSET command.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 249
Case Control Commands
Requests form of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).
Format:
ALL
PRINT, PUNCH
ENTHALPY SORT1 , = n
SORT2 PLOT
NONE
Example:
ENTHALPY=5
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each time.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of time for each grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Generates but does not print enthalpies.
ALL Enthalpy for all points will be output.
NONE Enthalpy for no points will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only
enthalpies of points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command will be output. (Integer>0)
Remark:
1. ENTHALPY=NONE is used to override a previous ENTHALPY=n or
ENTHALPY=ALL command.
Main Index
250
Requests the form and type of gradient and flux output in heat transfer analysis.
Format:
ALL
FLUX [ ( PRINT, PLOT, PUNCH ) ] = n
NONE
Examples:
FLUX=ALL
FLUX(PUNCH,PRINT)=17
FLUX=25
Describer Meaning
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT The output will be sent to the plot file.
ALL Flux for all elements will be output.
NONE Flux for no elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only fluxes
of elements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command will be output. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. FLUX=ALL in SOL 159 may produce excessive output.
2. FLUX=NONE overrides an overall request.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 251
Case Control Commands
Requests form of rate of change of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer analysis
(SOL 159).
Format:
ALL
PRINT, PUNCH
HDOT SORT1 , = n
SORT2 PLOT
NONE
Example:
HDOT=5
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each time.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of time for each grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Generates but does not print rate of change of enthalpy.
ALL Rate of change of enthalpy for all points will be output.
NONE Rate of change of enthalpy for no points will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only rates of
change of enthalpy for points with identification numbers that appear
on this SET command will be output. (Integer>0)
Remark:
1. HDOT=NONE is used to override a previous HDOT=n or HDOT=ALL
command.
Main Index
252
Selects the initial conditions for transient analysis (SOLs 109, 112, 129 and 159).
Format:
PHYSICAL
IC MODAL = n
STATSUB[,DIFFK]
Examples:
IC = 10
IC(PHYSICAL) = 100
IC(MODAL) = 200
IC(STATSUB) = 1000
IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) = 2000
Describer Meaning
PHYSICAL The TIC Bulk Data entries selected by set n define initial conditions for
coordinates involving grid, scalar and extra points. (Default).
MODAL The TIC Bulk Data entries selected by set n define initial conditions for
modal coordinates and extra points. See Remark 3.
STATSUB Use the solution of the static analysis subcase n as the initial condition.
See Remark 4.
DIFFK Include the effects of differential stiffness in the solution. See Remarks 4.
and 5.
n For the PHYSICAL (the default) and MODAL options, n is the set
identification number of TIC Bulk Data entries for structural analysis
(SOL 109, 112 and 129) or TEMP and TEMPD entries for heat transfer
analysis (SOL 159). For the STATSUB option, n is the ID of a static
analysis subcase. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. For structural analysis, TIC entries will not be used (therefore, no initial
conditions) unless selected in the Case Control Section.
2. Only the PHYSICAL option (the default) may be specified in heat transfer
analysis (SOL 159).
3. IC(MODAL) may be specified only in modal transient analysis (SOL 112).
4. IC(STATSUB) and IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) may not both be specified in the same
execution.
5. The DIFFK keyword is meaningful only when used in conjunction with the
STATSUB keyword.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 253
Case Control Commands
6. The following examples illustrate the usage of the various options of the IC Case
Control command.
$ SPECIFY INITIAL CONDITIONS FOR PHYSICAL COORDINATES
$ IN SOL 109 OR SOL 112
IC(PHYSICAL) = 100
or
IC = 100
$ SPECIFY INITIAL CONDITIONS FOR MODAL COORDINATES
$ IN SOL 112
IC(MODAL) = 200
Main Index
254
Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear anywhere
within the input data file.
Format:
INCLUDE ’filename’
Describer Meaning
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must
supply the name according to installation or machine requirements. It is
recommended that the filename be enclosed by single right-hand
quotation marks (’).
Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the Bulk Data from another file called
MYBULK.DATA:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
INCLUDE ’MYCASE.DATA’
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Remarks:
1. INCLUDE statements may be nested; that is, INCLUDE statements may appear
inside the external file. The nested depth level must not be greater than 10.
2. The total length of any line in an INCLUDE statement must not exceed 72
characters. Long file names may be split across multiple lines. For example the
file:
/dir123/dir456/dir789/filename.dat
may be included with the following input:
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
/dir789/filename.dat’
3. See the MSC.Nastran 2005 Installation and Operations Guide for more
examples.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 255
Case Control Commands
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of at least one external load Bulk Data entry. The set
identification must appear on at least one FORCE, FORCE1, FORCE2,
FORCEAX, GRAV, MOMAX, MOMENT, MOMENT1, MOMENT2,
LOAD, PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX, QVOL,
QVECT, QHBDY, QBDY1, QBDY2, QBDY3, PRESAX, RFORCE, SPCD, or
SLOAD entry. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. A GRAV entry cannot have the same set identification number as any of the other
loading entry types. If it is desired to apply a gravity load along with other static
loads, a LOAD Bulk Data entry must be used.
2. LOAD is only applicable in linear and nonlinear statics, inertia relief, differential
stiffness, buckling, and heat transfer problems.
3. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD), thermal
(TEMP(LOAD)), element deformation (DEFORM), and constrained displacement
(SPC) loads.
4. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique set
identification numbers.
Main Index
256
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a multipoint constraint set. This set
identification number must appear on at least one MPC or MPCADD Bulk
Data entry. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command must appear above the first SUBCASE
command.
2. Multiple boundary (MPC sets) conditions are not allowed in superelement
analysis. If more than one MPC set is specified per superelement (including the
residual), then the second and subsequent sets will be ignored.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 257
Case Control Commands
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NLPARM and NLPCI Bulk Data entries. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. NLPARM and NLPCI entries in the Bulk Data will not be used unless selected.
2. NLPARM may appear above or within a subcase.
Main Index
258
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NOLINi or NLRGAP Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)
Remark:
1. NOLINi Bulk Data entry will be ignored unless selected in the Case Control
Section.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 259
Case Control Commands
OLOAD SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG , PSDF, ATOC, CRMS ,
SORT2 PLOT PHASE or RALL
ALL
RPRINT
, RPUNCH , [ CID ] = n
NORPRINT
NONE
Examples:
OLOAD=ALL‘
OLOAD(SORT1, PHASE)=5‘
OLOAD(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH=20
OLOAD(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each
load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time, depending on the solution
sequence.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency or time for
each grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output.
Use of either REAL or IMAG yields the same output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output.
Phase output is in degrees.
PSDF Requests the power spectral density function be calculated and
stored in the database for random analysis post-processing. Request
must be made above the subcase level and RANDOM must be
selected in the Case Control.
ATOC Requests the autocorrelation function be calculated and stored in the
database for random analysis post-processing. Request must be made
above the subcase level and RANDOM must be selected in the Case
Control.
CRMS Requests all of PSDF, ATOC and CRMS be calculated for random
analysis post-processing. Request must be made above the subcase
level and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control.
Main Index
260
Describer Meaning
RALL Requests all of PSDF, ATOC and CRMS be calculated for random
analysis post-processing. Request must be made above the subcase
level and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control.
RPRINT Writes random analysis results in the print file (Default).
NORPRINT Disables the writing of random analysis results in the print file.
RPUNCH Writes random analysis results in the punch file.
CID Request to print output coordinate system ID in printed output file,
F06 file.
ALL Applied loads for all points will be output. See Remarks 2. and 8.
NONE Applied load for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only
loads on points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command will be output. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Both PRINT and PUNCH may be requested.
2. See Remark 2 under “DISPLACEMENT” on page 239 for a discussion of SORT1
and SORT2. In the SORT1 format, only nonzero values will be output.
3. In a statics problem, a request for SORT2 causes loads at all requested points (zero
and nonzero) to be output.
4. OLOAD=NONE overrides an overall output request.
5. In the statics superelement solution sequences, and in the dynamics SOLs 107
through 112, 118, 145, 146, and 200. OLOADs are available for superelements and
the residual structure only externally applied loads are printed, and not loads
transmitted from upstream superelements. Transmitted loads can be obtained
with GPFORCE requests.
• In the nonlinear transient analysis solution sequences SOLs 129 and 159,
OLOADs are available only for residual structure points and include loads
transmitted by upstream superelements.
6. In nonlinear analysis, OLOAD output will not reflect changes due to follower
forces.
7. Loads generated via the SPCD Bulk Data entry do not appear in OLOAD output.
8. In SORT1 format, OLOADs recovered at consecutively numbered scalar points
are printed in groups of six (sextets) per line of output. But if a scalar point is not
consecutively numbered, then it will begin a new sextet on a new line of output.
If a sextet can be formed and it is zero, then the line will not be printed. If a sextet
cannot be formed, then zero values may be output.
9. OLOAD results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the
Main Index
GRID Bulk Data entry).
CHAPTER C 261
Case Control Commands
10. In inertia relief analysis the OLOAD output is interpreted differently for SOLs 1,
101, and 200:
• In SOL 1, the output shows only the applied loads.
• In SOLs 101 and 200, the output includes both the inertia loads and applied
loads.
11. The option of PSDF, ATOC, CRMS and RALL, or any combination of them, can
be selected for random analysis. The results can be either printed in the .f06 file or
punched n the punch file, or output in both files.
12. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as
DISPlacement, VELOcity, ACCEleration, OLOAD, SPCForce and MPCForce. In
addition, CID keyword needs to appear only once in a grid related output request
anywhere in the Case Control Section to turn on the printing algorithm.
Main Index
262
Delimits the various types of commands for the structure plotter, curve plotter, grid point
stress, and MSGSTRESS.
Format:
PLOT
POST
OUTPUT XYOUT
XYPLOT
CARDS
Examples:
OUTPUT
OUTPUT(PLOT)
OUTPUT(XYOUT)
Describer Meaning
PLOT Beginning of the structure plotter request. This command must precede all
structure plotter control commands. Plotter commands are described in
“OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands” on page 483.
POST Beginning of grid point stress SURFACE and VOLUME commands. This
command must precede all SURFACE and VOLUME commands.
XYOUT or Beginning of curve plotter request. This command must precede all curve
XYPLOT plotter control commands. XYPLOT and XYOUT are entirely equivalent.
Curve plotter commands are described in “X-Y PLOT Commands” on
page 525.
CARDS The OUTPUT(CARDS) packet is used by the MSGSTRESS program. See
the MSGMESH Analyst’s Guide for details. These commands have no
format rules. This package must terminate with the command
ENDCARDS (starting in column 1).
Remarks:
1. The structure plotter request OUTPUT(PLOT), the curve plotter request
OUTPUT(XYOUT or XYPLOT), and the grid point stress requests
(OUTPUT(POST)) must follow the standard Case Control commands.
2. If OUTPUT is specified without a describer, then the subsequent commands are
standard Case Control commands.
3. Case Control commands specified after OUTPUT(POST) are SURFACE and
VOLUME.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 263
Case Control Commands
Specifies values for parameters. Parameters are described in “Parameters” on page 601.
Format:
PARAM,n,V1,V2
Examples:
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,K6ROT,1.0
Describer Meaning
n Parameter name (one to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which
is alphabetic).
V1, V2 Parameter value based on parameter type, as follows:
Type V1 V2
Integer Integer Blank
Real, single precision Real Blank
Character Character Blank
Real, double precision Real, Double Precision Blank
Complex, single precision Real or Blank Real or Blank
Complex, double precision Real, Double Precision Real, Double Precision
Remarks:
1. The PARAM command is normally used in the Bulk Data Section and is described
in the “Bulk Data Entries” on page 849.
2. The parameter values that may be defined in the Case Control Section are
described in “Parameters” on page 601. Case Control PARAM commands in
user-written DMAPs requires the use of the PVT module, described in the
MSC.Nastran 2005 DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
Main Index
264
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number. Any set may be redefined by reassigning its
identification number. SETs specified under a SUBCASE command are
recognized for that SUBCASE only. (Integer>0)
Main Index
CHAPTER C 265
Case Control Commands
Describer Meaning
r 1, r 2, etc. Frequencies or times for output. The nearest solution frequency or time
will be output. EXCEPT and THRU cannot be used. If an OFREQ or
OTIME command references the set then the values must be listed in
ascending sequences, r 1 < r 2 < r 3 < r 4 ...etc., otherwise some output may
be missing. If an OFREQ or OTIME command is not present, all
frequencies or times will be output. (Real>0.0)
ALL All members of the set will be processed.
Remarks:
1. A SET command may be more than one physical command. A comma at the end
of a physical command signifies a continuation command. Commas may not end
a set. THRU may not be used for continuation. Place a number after the THRU.
2. Set identification numbers following EXCEPT within the range of the THRU must
be in ascending order.
3. In SET 88 above, the numbers 77, 78, etc., are included in the set because they are
outside the prior THRU range.
Main Index
266
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a single-point constraint that appears on a
SPC, SPC1, or SPCADD Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command must appear above the first SUBCASE
command.
2. Multiple boundary conditions are only supported in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 145 and
200. Multiple boundary conditions are not allowed for upstream superelements.
the BC command must be specified to define multiple boundary conditions for
the residual structure in SOLs 103, 105, 145 and 200.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 267
Case Control Commands
Describer Meaning
n Subcase identification number. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. The subcase identification number, n, must be greater than all previous subcase
identification numbers.
2. Plot requests and RANDPS requests refer to n.
3. See the MODES command for use of this command in normal modes analysis.
4. If a comment follows n, then the first few characters of the comment will appear
in the subcase label in the upper right-hand corner of the output.
Main Index
268
Selects the temperature set to be used in either material property calculations or thermal
loading in heat transfer and structural analysis.
Format:
INITIAL
TEMPERATURE MATERIAL = n
LOAD
BOTH
Examples:
TEMPERATURE(LOAD)=15
TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL)=7
TEMPERATURE=7
Describer Meaning
MATERIAL The selected temperature set will be used to determine temperature-
dependent material properties indicated on the MATTi Bulk Data
entries. See Remarks 6., 7. and 8.
LOAD The selected temperature set will be used to determine an equivalent
static load and to update material properties in a nonlinear analysis. See
Remarks 2., 5., 6. and 7.
BOTH Both MATERIAL and LOAD will use the same temperature set.
n Set identification number of TEMP, TEMPD, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, TEMPF,
or TEMPAX Bulk Data entries. (Integer > 0)
INITIAL The selected temperature table will be used to determine initial
temperature distribution in nonlinear static analysis. See Remarks 4., 6.,
7., 8. and 9.
Remarks:
1. In linear analysis, only one temperature-dependent material request should be
made in any problem and should be specified above the subcase level. If multiple
requests are made, then only the last request will be processed. See also Remarks
6. and 7.
2. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD command), thermal
(TEMP(LOAD) command), element deformation (DEFORM command) and
constrained displacement (SPC command) loads.
3. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique set
identification numbers.
4. INITIAL is used in steady state heat transfer analysis for conduction material
properties and provides starting values for iteration.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 269
Case Control Commands
εT = A ( To ) ⋅ ( T – To )
where A ( T o ) is the thermal expansion coefficient defined on the MATi Bulk Data
entries, T is the load temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(LOAD) and T o
is the initial temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(INITIAL). The following
rules apply for TEMPERATURE(INITIAL), TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL), and
TREF on the MATi entries:
• If TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and TREF are specified, then the
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) set will be used as the initial temperature to
calculate both the loads and the material properties.
• If TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) and TREF are specified, then TREF will
be used as the initial temperature in calculating the load and the
TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) set will be used for the calculation of
material properties.
• If no TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) or TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) is
present, TREF will be used to calculate both the load and the material
properties.
7. In nonlinear static analysis, temperature strains are calculated with
ε T = A ( T ) ⋅ ( T – TREF ) – A ( T o ) ⋅ ( T o – TREF )
where A ( T ) is the thermal expansion coefficient defined on the MATi Bulk Data
entries. T is the load temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(LOAD) and T o
is the initial temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(INITIAL). The following
rules apply
• The specification of TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) is required above the
subcase level. The specification of TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) or
TEMPERATURE(BOTH) will cause a fatal error.
• If a subcase does not contain a TEMPERATURE(LOAD) request, then the
thermal load set will default to the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) set.
• TEMPERATURE(LOAD) will also cause the update of temperature-
dependent material properties due to the temperatures selected in the
thermal load set. Temperature-dependent material properties are
specified with MATi, MATTi, MATS1, and/or TABLEST Bulk Data
entries.
• If TREF and TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) are specified, then the
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) set will be used as the initial temperature to
calculate both the loads and the material properties. Both are used in the
definition of thermal strain.
Main Index
270
Main Index
CHAPTER C 271
Case Control Commands
Selects the transfer function set(s) to be added to the direct input matrices.
Format:
TFL=n
Example:
TFL=77
TFL = 1, 25, 77
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a TF Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. Transfer functions will not be used unless selected in the Case Control Section.
2. Transfer functions are supported in dynamics problems only.
3. Transfer functions are described in the MSC.Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis
User’s Guide.
4. It is recommended that PARAM,AUTOSPC,NO be specified when using transfer
functions. See “Constraint and Mechanism Problem Identification in
SubDMAP SEKR” on page 409 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. The transfer functions are additive if multiple TF values are referenced on the TFL
command.
Main Index
272
ALL
PRINT, PUNCH
THERMAL SORT1 , = n
SORT2 PLOT
NONE
Examples:
THERMAL=5
THER(PRINT,PUNCH)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output is presented as a tabular listing of point temperatures for each
load or time step.
SORT2 Output is presented as a tabular listing of loads or time steps for each.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Compute temperatures but do not print.
ALL Temperatures for all points will be output.
NONE Temperatures for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only
temperatures of points with identification numbers that appear on this
SET command will be output. (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. The THERMAL output request is designed for use with the heat transfer option.
The printed output will have temperature headings. The PUNCH option
produces TEMP Bulk Data entries, and the SID on the entries will be the subcase
number (=1 if no SUBCASES are specified).
2. SORT1 is the default in steady state heat transfer analysis. SORT2 is the default
in transient heat transfer analysis.
3. In a transient heat transfer analysis, the SID on the punched TEMP Bulk Data
entries, equal the time step number.
Main Index
CHAPTER C 273
Case Control Commands
Selects integration and output time steps for linear or nonlinear transient analysis.
Format:
TSTEP=n
Example:
TSTEP=731
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a TSTEP or TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry.
(Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. A TSTEP entry must be selected to execute a linear transient analysis (SOLs 9, 12,
109, or 112) and TSTEPNL for a nonlinear transient analysis (SOLs 129 and 159).
2. A TSTEPNL entry must be selected in each subcase to execute a nonlinear
transient problem.
3. For the application of time-dependent loads in modal frequency response
analysis (SOLs 111 and 146), or TSTEP entry must be selected by the TSTEP
command. The time-dependent loads will be recomputed in frequency domain
by a Fourier Transform.
Main Index
274
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Bulk Data Entries
D
■ Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries
Main Index
276
Main Index
CHAPTER D 277
Bulk Data Entries
SLOAD TABLED1
TABLED2
GRID TABLED3
SPOINT DLOAD TABLED4
QVOL TLOAD1
TLOAD2
CBAR PBAR
CBEAM PBEAM
CBEND PBEND TEMPBC
CHEXA PSOLID
CHEX1 PROD DELAY
CHEX2 PSHELL
CONROD PTUBE TABLED1
CPENTA TABLED2
CQUAD4 TABLED3
MAT4
CQUAD8 TABLED4
MAT5
CROD
MATT4
CTETRA QVECT
MATT5
CTRIA3
CTRIA6
CTRIAX6 TABLEM1
CTUBE TABLEM2
TABLEM3
QVECT TABLEM4
CHBDYE
CHBDYG RADM
CHBDYP
RADBND
PHBDY
RADMT
BDYOR
QHBDY TABLEM1
QBDY2 TABLEM2
TABLEM3
GRID TABLEM4
QBDY1 BDYOR
CHBDYE
CHBDYG PHBDY
CHBDYP
QBDY3
CHBDYE
CHBDYG
CHBDYP
Figure 4-1 Thermal Loads – Bulk Data and Case Control Interaction
Main Index
278
GRID CHBDYE
CHBDYG
PHBDY
CHBDYP
RADCAV BDYOR
CHBDYE RADBND
CHBDYG
CHBDYP PHBDY
RADM RADMT
BDYOR
TABLEM1
TABLEM2
TABLEM3
TABLEM4
Main Index
CHAPTER D 279
Bulk Data Entries
$ Comment
Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere within
the input file.
Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.
Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE
Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.
Main Index
280
Defines default values for the CHBDYP, CHBDYG, and CHBDYE entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BDYOR TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMINF RADMIDB PID GO
CE E1 E2 E3
Example:
BDYOR AREA4 2 2 3 3 10
Field Contents
TYPE Default surface type. See Remark 2. (Character)
IVIEWF Default identification number of front VIEW entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
IVIEWB Default identification number of back VIEW entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDF Default identification number of a RADM entry for front face. (Integer > 0 or
blank)
RADMIDB Default identification number of a RADM entry for back face. (Integer > 0 or
blank)
PID Default PHBDY property entry identification number. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GO Default orientation grid point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CE Default coordinate system for defining the orientation vector. (Integer > 0 or
blank)
E1, E2, E3 Default components of the orientation vector in coordinate system CE. The origin
of this vector is grid point G1 on a CHBDYP entry. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
1. Only one BDYOR entry may be specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. TYPE specifies the type of CHBDYi element surface; allowable values are: POINT,
LINE, REV, AREA3, AREA4, ELCYL, FTUBE, AREA6, AREA8, and TUBE.
3. IVIEWF and IVIEWB are specified for view factor calculations only (see VIEW entry).
4. GO is only used from BDYOR if neither GO nor the orientation vector is defined on the
CHBDYP entry and GO is > 0.
5. E1, E2, E3 is not used if GO is defined on either the BDYOR entry or the CHBDYP entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 281
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CDAMP1 19 6 0 23 2
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PDAMP property entry. (Integer > 0;
Default = EID)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique integers, 1 through 6
may be specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points
and 1 through 6 applies to grid points.)
Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1
and/or C2 must be zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded
terminal G1 or G2 with a corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal
is a point with a displacement that is constrained to zero.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2), must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. When CDAMP1 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement
coordinate system specified by CD on the GRID entry.
Main Index
282
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP2 EID B G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CDAMP2 16 2.98 32 1
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
B Value of the scalar damper. (Real)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique integers, 1 through 6
may be specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points
and 1 through 6 applies to grid points.)
Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1
and/or C2 must be zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded
terminal G1 or G2 with a corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal
is a point with a displacement that is constrained to zero.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2), must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. When CDAMP2 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement
coordinate system specified by CD on the GRID entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 283
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP3 EID PID S1 S2
Example:
CDAMP3 16 978 24 36
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PDAMP entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. Only one scalar damper element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. When CDAMP3 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
Main Index
284
Defines a scalar damper element that connected only to scalar points and without reference to a
material or property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP4 EID B S1 S2
Example:
CDAMP 16 -2.6 4 9
4
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
B Scalar damper value. (Real)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. Only one scalar damper element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. If this entry is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 285
Bulk Data Entries
Defines a damping element that refers to a material property entry and connection to grid or
scalar points. This element is intended for heat transfer analysis only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP5 EID PID G1 G2
Example:
CDAMP5 1 4 10 20
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Identification number of a PDAMP5 property entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 and G1 ≠ G2 )
Remarks:
1. G1 or G2 may be blank or zero indicating a constraint.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. CDAMP5 generates a lumped heat capacity in heat transfer analysis.
4. A scalar point specified on CDAMP5 need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
Main Index
286
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CELAS1 2 6 8 1
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PELAS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if scalar point.)
Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1
and/or C2 must be zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded
terminal G1 or G2 with a corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal
is a point with a displacement that is constrained to zero. If only scalar points and/or
ground are involved, it is more efficient to use the CELAS3 entry.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
6. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement
coordinate system specified by CD on the GRID entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 287
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS2 EID K G1 C1 G2 C2 GE S
Example:
CELAS2 28 6.2+3 32 19 4
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
K Stiffness of the scalar spring. (Real)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point or scalar identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 blank or zero if scalar point.)
GE Damping coefficient. See Remarks 6. and 8. (Real)
S Stress coefficient. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1
and/or C2 must be zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded
terminal G1 or G2 with a corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal
is a point with a displacement that is constrained to zero. If only scalar points and/or
ground are involved, it is more efficient to use the CELAS4 entry.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
6. If PARAM,W4 is not specified, GE is ignored in transient analysis. See “Parameters”
on page 601.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom in the displacement
coordinate system specified by CD on the GRID entry.
8. To obtain the damping coefficient GE, multiply the critical damping ratio C ⁄ C 0 by 2.0.
Main Index
288
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS3 EID PID S1 S2
Example:
CELAS3 19 2 14 15
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PELAS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. Only one scalar spring element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 289
Bulk Data Entries
Defines a scalar spring element that is connected only to scalar points, without reference to a
property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS4 EID K S1 S2
Example:
CELAS4 42 6.2-3 2
Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
K Stiffness of the scalar spring. (Real)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2, but not both, may be blank or zero indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element
identification numbers.
3. A structural damping coefficient is not available with CELAS4. The value of g is
assumed to be 0.0.
4. No stress coefficient is available with CELAS4.
5. Only one scalar spring element may be defined on a single entry.
6. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
7. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
Main Index
290
Defines a boundary condition surface element with reference to a heat conduction element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB
Example:
CHBDYE 2 10 1 3 3 2 2
Field Contents
EID Surface element identification number for a specific side of a particular element.
See Remarks 1. and 9. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among all elements.)
EID2 A heat conduction element identification number. (Integer > 0)
SIDE A consistent element side identification number. See Remark 6. (1 < Integer < 6)
IVIEWF A VIEW entry identification number for the front face of surface element.
(Integer > 0, see Remark 2. for default.)
IVIEWB A VIEW entry identification number for the back face of surface element.
(Integer > 0, see Remark 2. for default.)
RADMIDF RADM identification number for front face of surface element. (Integer > 0, see
Remark 2. for default.)
RADMIDB RADM identification number for back face of surface element. (Integer > 0, see
Remark 2. for default.)
Remarks:
1. EID is a unique elemental ID associated with a particular surface element. EID2
identifies the general heat conduction element being considered for this surface
element.
2. The defaults for IVIEWF, IVIEWB, RADMIDF, and RADMIDB may be specified on the
BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank both on the CHBDYE entry and the BDYOR
entry, then the default is zero.
3. For the front face of shell elements, the right-hand rule is used as one progresses
around the element surface from G1 to G2 to ... Gn. For the edges of shell elements or
the ends of line elements, an outward normal is used to define the front surface.
4. If the surface element is to be used in the calculation of view factors, it must have an
associated VIEW entry.
5. All conduction elements to which any boundary condition is to be applied must be
individually identified with the application of one of the surface element entries:
CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 291
Bulk Data Entries
side gp gp gp gp
1 4 3 2 1
2 1 2 6 5
3 2 3 7 6
4 3 4 8 7
5 4 1 5 8
6 5 6 7 8
CPENTA
side gp gp gp gp
1 3 2 1
2 1 2 5 4
3 2 3 6 5
4 3 1 4 6
5 4 5 6
CTETRA
side gp gp gp
1 3 2 1
2 1 2 4
3 2 3 4
4 3 1 4
Main Index
292
Line Type Sides –The second side (first line) proceeds from grid point 1 to grid point 2
of the shell element, and the remaining lines are numbered consecutively. The
thickness of the line is that of the shell element, and the normal to the line is outward
from the shell element in the plane of the shell. Note that any midside nodes are
ignored in this specification.
8. Side conventions for line elements.
LINE elements have one linear side (side 1) with geometry that is the same as that of
the element and two POINT-type sides corresponding to the two points bounding the
linear element (first grid point-side 2; second grid point-side 3).
The TUBE-type element has two linear sides of type TUBE. The first side represents the
outside with diameters equal to that of the outside of the tube. The second side
represents the inside with diameters equal to that of the inside of the tube.
Point Sides – Point sides may be used with any linear element. The direction of the
outward normals of these points is in line with the element axis, but pointing away
from the element. The area assigned to these POINT-type sides is consistent with the
element geometry.
Rev Sides –The CTRIAX6 element has associated with it three REV sides. The first side
is associated with Grid Points G1, G2, and G3. The positive face identification normals
point away from the element.
9. Application of boundary conditions to CHBDYE is referenced through the EID.
Boundary conditions can reference either the front or back face of the CHBDYE by
specifying +EID or -EID respectively. Correspondingly, the back face is minus the
normal vector of the front face. Similarly, IVIEWF and RADMIDF are associated with
+EID and IVIEWB and RADMIDB with -EID. For radiation problems, if the RADMIDF
or RADMIDB is zero, default radiant properties assume perfect black body behavior.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 293
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
Example:
CHBDYG 2 AREA4 3 3 2 2
Field Contents
EID Surface element identification number. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among
all elemental entries.)
TYPE Surface type. See Remark 3. (Character)
IVIEWF A VIEW entry identification number for the front face. (Integer > 0; see Remark 2.
for default.)
IVIEWB A VIEW entry identification number for the back face. (Integer > 0; see Remark 2.
for default.)
RADMIDF RADM identification number for front face of surface element. (Integer > 0; see
Remark 2. for default.)
RADMIDB RADM identification number for back face of surface element. (Integer > 0; see
Remark 2. for default.)
Gi Grid point IDs of grids bounding the surface. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. EID is a unique ID associated with a particular surface element as defined by the grid
points.
2. The defaults for TYPE, IVIEWF, IVIEWB, RADMIDF, and RADMIDB may be specified
on the BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank on both the CHBDYG entry and the
BDYOR entry, then the default is zero.
3. TYPE specifies the kind of element surface; allowed types are: REV, AREA3, AREA4,
AREA6, and AREA8. See Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4, and Figure 4-5.
• TYPE = REV
Main Index
294
The “REV” type has two primary grid points that must lie in the x-z plane of the
basic coordinate system with x>0. A midside grid point G3 is optional and
supports convection or heat flux from the edge of the six-noded CTRIAX6
element. The defined area is a conical section with z as the axis of symmetry. A
property entry is required for convection, radiation, or thermal vector flux.
Automatic view factor calculations with VIEW data are not supported for the
REV option.
z
G2 n
T
G3 G1
x
y
n = ( ey × T ) ⁄ ey × T
G1 G2 G1 G2
AREA3 AREA4
G3 G4 G7 G3
G6 G5 G8 G6
G1 G4 G2 G1 G5 G2
AREA6 AREA8
(Grid points G4 through G6 optional) (Grid points G5 through G8 optional)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 295
Bulk Data Entries
G3 or G4
n
T 1x
G2
G1 T 12
( T 12 × T 1x )
n = ------------------------------
T 12 × T 1x
Main Index
296
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYP EID PID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB G1 G2 G0
RADMIDF RADMIDB GMID CE E1 E2 E3
Example:
Field Contents
EID Surface element identification number. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among
all element identification numbers.)
PID PHBDY property entry identification numbers. (Integer > 0)
TYPE Surface type. See Remark 3. (Character)
IVIEWF VIEW entry identification number for the front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
IVIEWB VIEW entry identification number for the back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
G1, G2 Grid point identification numbers of grids bounding the surface. (Integer > 0)
GO Orientation grid point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
RADMIDF RADM entry identification number for front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDB RADM entry identification number for back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GMID Grid point identification number of a midside node if it is used with the line type
surface element.
CE Coordinate system for defining orientation vector. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
Ei Components of the orientation vector in coordinate system CE. The origin of the
orientation vector is grid point G1. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
1. EID is a unique ID associated with a particular surface element as defined by the grid
point(s).
2. The defaults for PID, TYPE, IVIEWF, IVIEWB, GO, RADMIDF, RADMIDB, CE, and Ei
may be specified on the BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank on both the
CHBDYP entry and the BDYOR entry, then the default is zero.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 297
Bulk Data Entries
3. TYPE specifies the kind of element surface; the allowed types are: “POINT,” “LINE,”
“ELCYL,” “FTUBE,” and “TUBE.” For TYPE = “FTUBE” and TYPE = “TUBE,” the
geometric orientation is completely determined by G1 and G2; the GO, CE, E1, E2, and
E3 fields are ignored.
• TYPE = “POINT”
TYPE = “POINT” has one primary grid point, requires a property entry, and the
normal vector Vi must be specified if thermal flux is to be used.
V
n
G1
G2
GMID
V
n T
G1
The unit normal lies in the plane V and T , is perpendicular to T , and is given by:
T × (V × T)
n = -----------------------------------
T × (V × T)
• TYPE = “ELCYL”
Main Index
298
TYPE = “ELCYL” (elliptic cylinder) has two connected primary grid points and
requires a property entry. The vector must be nonzero. Automatic view factor
calculations are not available.
n
V
T
R1
R2
The same logic is used to determine n as for TYPE = LINE. The “radius” R1 is
in the n direction, and R2 is the perpendicular to n and T (see fields 7 and 8 of
PHBDY entry).
4. For TYPE = “POINT,” TYPE = “LINE,” and TYPE = “ELCYL,” geometric orientation is
required. The required information is sought in the following order:
• If GO > 0 is found on the CHBDYP entry, it is used.
• Otherwise, if a nonblank CE is found on the CHBDYP continuation entry, this
CE and the corresponding vectors E1, E2, and E3 are used.
• If neither of the above, the same information is sought in the same way from the
BDYOR entry.
• If none of the above apply, a warning message is issued.
5. The geometric orientation can be defined by either GO or the vector E1, E2, E3.
• If GO > zero:
For a TYPE = “POINT” surface, the normal to the front face is the vector from G1
to GO. For the TYPE = “LINE” surface, the plane passes through G1, G2, GO
and the right-hand rule is used on this sequence to get the normal to the front
face. For TYPE = “ELCYL” surface the first axis of the ellipse lies on the G1, G2,
GO plane, and the second axis is normal to this plane. For TYPE = “FTUBE” or
“TUBE” surface, no orientation is required, and GO is superfluous.
• If GO is zero:
For a TYPE = “POINT” surface, the normal to the front face is the orientation
vector. For the TYPE = “LINE” surface, the plane passes through G1, G2, and
the orientation vector; the front face is based on the right-hand rule for the
vectors G2-G1 and the orientation vector. For TYPE = “ELCYL” surface, the first
axis of the ellipse lies on the G1, G2, orientation vector plane, and the second axis
is normal to this plane.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 299
Bulk Data Entries
Main Index
300
Defines the control mechanism for QVECT, QVOL, QBCY3, in heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONTRLT ID Sensor SFORM CTYPE Pl Ph PTYPE PZERO
Example:
CONTRLT 100 20 3 68. 73. 1 0.
Field Contents
ID Control node ID as well as CONTROLT ID (Integer > 0, no default). See Remark 1.
Sensor Grid or scalar point ID of the sensor (Integer > 0, no default). See Remark 2.
SFORM Sensor output form (Character, T, default = T). See Remark 3.
CTYPE Control type (Character, TSTAT for thermostat, default = TSTAT). See Remark 4.
Pl, Ph Lower and upper limit value for desired temperature in the thermostat (real, no
default). See Remark 5.
PTYPE Process type (Integer value 1 thru 6). No default, see Remark 5.
PZERO Initial controller value (0. < Real < 1., Default = 0.) See Remark 4.
DT Monitoring time interval, or sampling period (Real > 0., Default = 0) See Remark 6.
Delay Time delay after the switch is triggered or time for delayed control action in PID
control. (Real < 0., Default = 0.) See Remark 7.
TAUc Decay time constant for actuator response (Real > 0., default = 0.) See Remark 7.
Remarks:
1. The CONTRLT ID is referenced by CNTRLND entry identified on any of the QVECT,
QVOL, QBDY3, Bulk Data entries. If any grid or scalar point ID is the same as the
CONTRLT ID, then the combined logic associated with the controller and the control
node will be in force for the LBC referenced. Any number of CONTROLT statements
may exist in a single model.
2. Sensor point, where a feedback temperature or rate of change of temperature is
measured. May be a dependent DOF in a MPC relationship.
3. Sensor output may only be temperature (T)
4. Control type can only be TSTAT. The PZERO field cannot have any other value but 0.0
or 1.0.
5. The upper and lower limit values (Pl and Ph) define a dead band for a thermostat. The
available thermostat controller (TSTAT) formats are (PTYPE = 1 thru 6).
Main Index
CHAPTER D 301
Bulk Data Entries
Specifies a free convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through connection to
a surface element (CHBDYi entry).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONV EID PCONID FLMND CNTRLND TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4
Example:
Field Contents
EID CHBDYG, CHBDYE, or CHBDYP surface element identification number.
(Integer > 0)
PCONID Convection property identification number of a PCONV entry. (Integer > 0)
FLMND Point for film convection fluid property temperature. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CNTRLND Control point for free convection boundary condition. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
TAi Ambient points used for convection. (Integer > 0 for TA1 and Integer > 0 for TA2
through TA8; Default for TA2 through TA8 is TA1.)
Remarks:
1. The basic exchange relationship can be expressed in one of the following forms:
EXPF
• q = H ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND = 0
EXPF
• q = ( H ⋅ u CNTRLND ) ( T – TAMB ) ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND ≠ 0
EXPF EXPF
• q = H(T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND = 0
EXPF EXPF
• q = ( H ⋅ u CNTRLND ) ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND ≠ 0
EXPF is specified on the PCONV entry.
(See “PCONV” on page 1843 entry for additional clarification of forms.)
2. The continuation entry is not required.
3. CONV is used with an CHBDYi (CHBDYG, CHBDYE, or CHBDYP) entry having the
same EID.
4. The temperature of the film convection point provides the look up temperature to
determine the convection film coefficient. If FLMND=0, the reference temperature has
several options. It can be the average of surface and ambient temperatures, the surface
temperature, or the ambient temperature, as defined in the FORM field of the PCONV
Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
302
5. If only one ambient point is specified then all the ambient points are assumed to have
the same temperature. If midside ambient points are missing, the temperature of these
points is assumed to be the average of the connecting corner points.
6. See the Bulk Data entry, “PCONV” on page 1843, for an explanation of the
mathematical relationships involved in free convection and the reference temperature
for convection film coefficient.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 303
Bulk Data Entries
Specifies a forced convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through connection
to a surface element (CHBDYi entry).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONVM EID PCONID FLMND CNTMDOT TA1 TA2
Example:
Field Contents
EID CHBDYP element identification number. (Integer > 0)
PCONID Convection property identification number of a PCONVM entry. (Integer > 0)
FLMND Point used for fluid film temperature. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CNTMDOT Control point used for controlling mass flow. (Integer > 0)
TA1, TA2 Ambient points used for convection. (Integer > 0 for TA1 and Integer > 0 for TA2;
Default for TA2 is TA1.)
Remarks:
1. CONVM is used with an CHBDYP entry of type FTUBE having the same EID.
2. The temperature of the fluid film point may be specified to determine the material
properties for the fluid. If FLMND=0, the reference temperature has several options.
It can be the average of surface and ambient temperatures, the surface temperatures, or
the ambient temperature, as defined in the FORM field of the PCONVM Bulk Data
entry.
3. CNTMDOT must be set to the desired mass flow rate (mdot) to effect the advection of
energy downstream at an mdot ⋅ C p ⋅ T rate. In addition to the effect that mdot has on
the transfer of thermal energy in the streamwise direction, this control point value is
also used in computing the tube Reynolds number and subsequently the forced
convection heat transfer coefficient if requested. This enables the fluid stream to
exchange heat with its surroundings.
4. If only the first ambient point is specified then, the second ambient point is assumed to
have the same temperature.
5. See the Bulk Data entry, “PCONVM” on page 1845, for an explanation of the
mathematical relationships available for forced convection and the reference
temperature for fluid material properties.
Main Index
304
Defines the time delay term τ in the equations of the dynamic loading function.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2
Example:
Field Contents
SID Identification number of the DELAY entry. (Integer > 0)
Pi Grid, extra, or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integer 1 through 6 for grid point, blank or 0 for extra point
or scalar point.)
Ti Time delay τ for designated point Pi and component Ci. (Real)
Remarks:
1. One or two dynamic load time delays may be defined on a single entry.
2. SID must also be specified on a RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, or ACSRCE
entry. See those entry descriptions for the formulas that define the manner in which
the time delay τ is used.
3. A DAREA and/or LSEQ entry should be used to define a load at Pi and Ci.
4. In superelement analysis, DELAY entries may only be applied to loads on points in the
residual structure.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 305
Bulk Data Entries
Defines a dynamic loading condition for frequency response or transient response problems as
a linear combination of load sets defined via RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entries for frequency
response or TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entries for transient response.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DLOAD SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3
S4 L4 -etc.- *
Examples:
-2.0 9
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
S Scale factor. (Real)
Si Scale factors. (Real)
Li Load set identification numbers of RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, and
ACSRC entries. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Dynamic load sets must be selected in the Case Control Section with DLOAD = SID.
2. The load vector being defined by this entry is given by
{ P } = S ∑ Si { P i }
i
3. Each Li must be unique from any other Li on the same entry.
4. SID must be unique from all TLOADi and RLOADi entries.
5. Nonlinear transient load sets (NOLINi entries) may not be specified on DLOAD
entries. NOLINi entries are selected separately in the Case Control Section by the
NONLINEAR command.
6. A DLOAD entry may not reference a set identification number defined by another
DLOAD entry.
7. TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 loads may be combined only through the use of the DLOAD
entry.
8. RLOAD1 and RLOAD2 loads may be combined only through the use of the DLOAD
entry.
Main Index
306
X 11 X 12 … X 1n
X 21 X 22 … X 2n
[ NAME ] =
· · · ·
X m1 … … X mn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMI NAME “0” FORM TIN TOUT M N
A(I2,J) -etc.-
DMI BBB 0 2 1 1 4 2
DMI BBB 1 1 1. 3. 5.
DMI BBB 2 2 6. 4 8.
1.0 0.0
BBB = 3.0 6.0
5.0 0.0
0.0 8.0
DMI QQQ 0 2 3 3 4 2
Main Index
CHAPTER D 307
Bulk Data Entries
5.0 6.0
Field Contents
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1. Name is used to reference the data block in the
DMAP sequence. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which must be
alphabetic.)
FORM Form of matrix, as follows: (Integer)
1 = Square matrix (not symmetric)
2 = General rectangular matrix
3 = Diagonal matrix (M=number of rows, N = 1)
4 = Lower triangular factor
5 = Upper triangular factor
6 = Symmetric matrix
8 = Identity matrix (M=number of rows, N = M)
TIN Type of matrix being input, as follows: (Integer)
1 = Real, single precision (one field used/element)
2 = Real, double precision (one field used/element)
3 = Complex, single precision (two fields used/element)
4 = Complex, double precision (two fields used/element)
Main Index
308
Field Contents
TOUT Type of matrix being output, as follows: (Integer)
0 = Set by precision cell
1 = Real, single precision
2 = Real, double precision
3 = Complex, single precision
4 = Complex, double precision
M Number of rows in NAME. (Integer > 0)
N Number of columns in NAME. Except for FORM 3 and 8. (Integer > 0)
"0" Indicates the header entry.
J Column number of NAME. (Integer > 0)
I1, I2, etc. Row number of NAME, which indicates the beginning of a group of nonzero
elements in the column. See Remark 13. (Integer > 0)
A(Ix,J) Real part of element (see TIN). (Real)
B(Ix,J) Imaginary part of element (see TIN). (Real)
Remarks:
1. In order to use the DMI feature, the user must write a DMAP, or make alterations to a
solution sequence that includes the DMIIN module. See the MSC.Nastran 2005 DMAP
Programmer’s Guide. All of the rules governing the use of data blocks in DMAP
sequences apply.
2. The total number of DMIs and DTIs may not exceed 1000.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer of zero (0).
4. For symmetric matrices, the entire matrix must be input.
5. Only nonzero terms need be entered.
6. Leading and trailing zeros in a column do not have to be entered. However, a blank
field between nonzero fields on this entry is not equivalent to a zero. If a zero input is
required, the appropriate type zero must be entered (i.e., 0.0 or 0.0D0).
7. Complex input must have both the real and imaginary parts entered if either part is
nonzero; i.e., the zero component must be input explicitly.
8. If A(Ix,J) is followed by "THRU" in the next field and an integer row number "IX" after
the THRU, then A(lx,J) will be repeated in each row through IX. The "THRU" must
follow an element value. For example, the entries for a real matrix RRR would appear
as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) I1 A(I2,J)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 309
Bulk Data Entries
These entries will cause the first column of the matrix RRR to have a zero in row 1, the
values 1.0 in rows 2 through 10, a zero in row 11, and 2.0 in row 12.
9. Each column must be a single logical entry. The terms in each column must be
specified in increasing row number order.
10. The "FORM" options 4, 5, and 8 are nonstandard forms and may be used only in
conjunction with the modules indicated in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 DMI FORM Options
Modules
FORM Matrix Description
ADD FBS MATPRN MPYAD
4 Lower Triangular Factor X X
5 Upper Triangular Factor X X
8 Identity X X X X
11. Form 3 matrices are converted to Form 6 matrices, which may be used by any module.
12. Form 7 matrices may not be defined on this entry.
13. I1 must be specified. I2, etc. are not required if their matrix elements follow the
preceding element in the next row of the matrix. For example, in the column entry for
column 1 of QQQ, neither I2 nor I3 is specified.
14. The DMIG entry is more convenient for matrices with rows and columns that are
referenced by grid or scalar point degrees-of-freedom.
Main Index
310
Defines direct input matrices related to grid, extra, and/or scalar points. The matrix is defined
by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required for each
column with nonzero elements.
Header Entry Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIG NAME “0" IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL
DMIG NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 -etc.-
Example:
DMIG STIF 0 1 3 4
2 4 2.5+10 0. 50 1.0 0.
Field Contents
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first
of which is alphabetic.)
IFO Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,
M2GG, and B2GG Case Control commands. (Integer)
1 = Square
9 or 2 = Rectangular
6 = Symmetric
TIN Type of matrix being input: (Integer)
1 = Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
2 = Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
3 = Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.)
4 = Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.)
TOUT Type of matrix that will be created: (Integer)
0 = Set by precision system cell (Default)
1 = Real, single precision
2 = Real, double precision
3 = Complex, single precision
4 = Complex, double precision
POLAR Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format;
Integer > 0 indicates amplitude, phase format.)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 311
Bulk Data Entries
Field Contents
NCOL Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks
5. and 6. (Integer > 0)
GJ Grid, scalar or extra point identification number for column index. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for grid point GJ. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GJ is a
scalar or extra point.)
Gi Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number for row index. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number for Gi for a grid point. ( 0 < CJ ≤ 6 ; blank or zero if Gi is a
scalar or extra point.)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the
matrix is real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Matrices defined on this entry may be used in dynamics by selection in the Case
Control with K2PP = NAME, B2PP = NAME, M2PP = NAME for [Kpp], [Bpp], or [Mpp],
respectively. Matrices may also be selected for all solution sequences by
K2GG = NAME, B2GG = NAME, and M2GG = NAME. The g-set matrices are added
to the structural matrices before constraints are applied, while p-set matrices are added
in dynamics after constraints are applied. Load matrices may be selected by
P2G = NAME for dynamic and superelement analyses.
2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is
started with a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only
nonzero terms need be entered. The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ
pair may be entered more than once, but input of an element of the matrix more than
once will produce a fatal message.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either
below or above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a
fatal message will be issued if an element is input both below and above the diagonal.
5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and
IFO = 9. The number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all
DMIG matrices is always either p-set or g-set size, depending on the context.) The GJ
term is used for the column index. The CJ term is ignored.
6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, two different conventions are available:
• If IFO = 9, GJ and CJ will determine the sorted sequence, but will otherwise be
ignored; a rectangular matrix will be generated with the columns submitted
being in the 1 to N positions, where N is the number of logical entries submitted
(not counting the header entry).
• If IFO = 2, the number of columns of the rectangular matrix will be equal to the
index of the highest numbered non-null column (in internal sort). Trailing null
columns of the g- or p-size matrix will be truncated.
Main Index
312
Main Index
CHAPTER D 313
Bulk Data Entries
Defines the phase lead term θ in the equation of the dynamic loading function.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DPHASE SID P1 C1 TH1 P2 C2 TH2
Example:
Field Contents
SID Identification number of DPHASE entry. (Integer > 0)
Pi Grid, extra, or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integers 1 through 6 for grid points; zero or blank for extra
or scalar points)
THi Phase lead θ in degrees. (Real)
Remarks:
1. One or two dynamic load phase lead terms may be defined on a single entry.
2. SID must be referenced on a RLOADi entry. Refer to the RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entry
for the formulas that define how the phase lead θ is used.
3. A DAREA and/or LSEQ entry should be used to define a load at Pi and Ci.
4. In superelement analysis, DPHASE entries may only be applied to loads on points in
the residual structure.
Main Index
314
Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear anywhere within
the input data file.
Format:
INCLUDE’filename’
Describer:
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must supply the
name according to installation or machine requirements. It is recommended
that the filename be enclosed by single right-hand quotation marks.
Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the Bulk Data from another file called
MYBULK.DATA:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
BEGIN BULK
INCLUDE ’MYBULK.DATA’
ENDDATA
Remarks:
1. INCLUDE statements may be nested; that is, INCLUDE statements may appear inside
the external file. The nested depth level must not be greater than 10.
2. The total length of any line in an INCLUDE statement must not exceed 72 characters.
Long file names may be split across multiple lines. For example the file:
/dir123/dir456/dir789/filename.dat
may be included with the following input:
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
/dir789/filename.dat’
3. See the MSC.Nastran 2005 Installation and Operations Guide for more examples.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 315
Bulk Data Entries
Defines a static load as a linear combination of load sets defined via FORCE, MOMENT,
FORCE1, MOMENT1, FORCE2, MOMENT2, PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4,
PLOADX1, SLOAD, RFORCE, and GRAV entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LOAD SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3
S4 L4 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
S Overall scale factor. (Real)
Si Scale factor on Li. (Real)
Li Load set identification numbers defined on entry types listed above. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The load vector { P } is defined by
{ P } = S ∑ Si { P Li }
i
2. Load set IDs (Li) must be unique.
3. This entry must be used if acceleration loads (GRAV entry) are to be used with any of
the other types.
4. In the static solution sequences, the load set ID must be selected by the Case Control
command LOAD=SID. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced in
the LID field of an LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control
command LOADSET.
5. A LOAD entry may not reference a set identification number defined by another LOAD
entry.
Main Index
316
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAT4 MID K CP r H m HGEN REFENTH
Example:
Field Contents
MID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
K Thermal conductivity. (Blank or Real > 0.0)
CP Heat capacity per unit mass at constant pressure (specific heat). (Blank or
Real > 0.0)
ρ Density. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
H Free convection heat transfer coefficient. (Real or blank)
m Dynamic viscosity. See Remark 2. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
HGEN Heat generation capability used with QVOL entries. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
REFENTH Reference enthalpy. (Real or blank)
TCH Lower temperature limit at which phase change region is to occur. (Real or
blank)
TDELTA Total temperature change range within which a phase change is to occur.
(Real > 0.0 or blank)
QLAT Latent heat of fusion per unit mass associated with the phase change. (Real > 0.0
or blank)
Remarks:
1. The MID must be unique with respect to all other MAT4 and MAT5 entries. MAT4 may
specify material properties for any conduction elements as well as properties for a
forced convection fluid (see CONVM). MAT4 also provides the heat transfer
coefficient for free convection (see CONV).
2. For a forced convection fluid, µ must be specified.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 317
Bulk Data Entries
Main Index
318
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAT5 MID KXX KXY KXZ KYY KYZ KZZ CP
RHO HGEN
Example:
2.00
Field Contents
MID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
Kij Thermal conductivity. (Real)
CP Heat capacity per unit mass. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
RHO Density. (Real>0.0; Default=1.0)
HGEN Heat generation capability used with QVOL entries. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
Remarks:
1. The thermal conductivity matrix has the following form:
2. The material identification number may be the same as a MAT1, MAT2, or MAT3 entry
but must be unique with respect to other MAT4 or MAT5 entries.
3. MAT5 materials may be made temperature-dependent by use of the MATT5 entry.
4. When used for axisymmetric analysis (CTRIAX6), material properties are represented
where:
KXX = radial conductivity component
KYY = axial conductivity component
Main Index
CHAPTER D 319
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT4 MID T(K) T(CP) T(H) T(µ) T(HGEN)
Example(s):
MATT4 2 10 11
Field Contents
MID Identification number of a MAT4 entry that is temperature dependent.
(Integer > 0)
T(K) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence
of the thermal conductivity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(CP) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence
of the thermal heat capacity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(H) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence
of the free convection heat transfer coefficient. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(µ) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence
of the dynamic viscosity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(HGEN) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence
of the internal heat generation property for QVOL. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. The basic quantities on the MAT4 entry are always multiplied by the corresponding
tabular function referenced by the MATT4 entry.
2. If the fields are blank or zero, then there is no temperature dependence of the
referenced quantity on the MAT4 entry.
Main Index
320
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT5 MID T(KXX) T(KXY) T(KXZ) T(KYY) T(KYZ) T(KZZ) T(CP)
T(HGEN)
Example:
MATT5 24 73
Field Contents
MID Identification number of a MAT5 entry that is to be temperature dependent.
(Integer > 0)
T(Kij) Identification number of a TABLEMi entry. The TABLEMi entry specifies
temperature dependence of the matrix term. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(CP) Identification number of a TABLEMi entry that specifies the temperature
dependence of the thermal heat capacity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(HGEN) Identification number of a TABLEMi entry that gives the temperature dependence
of the internal heat generation property for the QVOL entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. The basic quantities on the MAT5 entry are always multiplied by the tabular function
referenced by the MATT5 entry.
2. If the fields are blank or zero, then there is no temperature dependence of the
referenced quantity on the basic MAT5 entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 321
Bulk Data Entries
∑ Aj u j = 0
j
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MPC SID G1 C1 A1 G2 C2 A2
G3 C3 A3 -etc.-
Example:
1 4 -2.91
Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gj Identification number of grid or scalar point. (Integer > 0)
Cj Component number. (Any one of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points; blank or
zero for scalar points.)
Aj Coefficient. (Real; Default = 0.0 except A1 must be nonzero.)
Remarks:
1. Multipoint constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command
MPC = SID.
2. The first degree-of-freedom (G1, C1) in the sequence is defined to be the dependent
degree-of-freedom. A dependent degree-of-freedom assigned by one MPC entry
cannot be assigned dependent by another MPC entry or by a rigid element.
3. Forces of multipoint constraint may be recovered in all solution sequences, except
SOL 129, with the MPCFORCE Case Control command.
4. The m-set degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry may not be specified on other
entries that define mutually exclusive sets. See the “Degree-of-Freedom Sets” on
page 1557 for a list of these entries.
5. By default, the grid point connectivity created by the MPC, MPCADD, and MPCAX
entries is not considered during resequencing, (see the PARAM,OLDSEQ description
in “Parameters” on page 1409). In order to consider the connectivity during
resequencing, SID must be specified on the PARAM,MPCX entry. Using the example
above, specify PARAM,MPCX,3.
Main Index
322
Defines a multipoint constraint set as a union of multipoint constraint sets defined via MPC
entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MPCADD SID S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
S8 S9 -etc.-
Example:
MPCADD 101 2 3 1 6 4
Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Sj Set identification numbers of multipoint constraint sets defined via MPC entries.
(Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Multipoint constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command
MPC = SID.
2. The Sj must be unique and may not be the identification number of a multipoint
constraint set defined by another MPCADD entry.
3. MPCADD entries take precedence over MPC entries. If both have the same SID, only
the MPCADD entry will be used.
4. By default, the grid point connectivity created by the MPC, MPCADD, and MPCAX
entries is not considered during resequencing, (see the PARAM,OLDSEQ description
in “Parameters” on page 1409). In order to consider the connectivity during
resequencing, SID must be specified on the PARAM,MPCX entry. Using the example
above, specify PARAM,MPCX,101.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 323
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NLPARM ID NINC DT KMETHOD KSTEP MAXITER CONV INTOUT
Example:
NLPARM 15 5 ITER
Field Contents
ID Identification number. (Integer > 0)
NINC Number of increments. See Remark 16. (0 < Integer < 1000; Default=10)
DT Incremental time interval for creep analysis. See Remark 3. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.0 for no creep.)
KMETHOD Method for controlling stiffness updates. See Remark 4. (Character = “AUTO”,
“ITER”, or “SEMI”; Default = “AUTO”.)
KSTEP Number of iterations before the stiffness update for ITER method. See Remark 5.
(Integer > 1; Default = 5)
MAXITER Limit on number of iterations for each load increment. See Remark 6. (Integer > 0;
Default = 25)
CONV Flags to select convergence criteria. See Remark 7. (Character = “U”, “P”, “W”, or
any combination; Default = “PW”.)
INTOUT Intermediate output flag. See Remark 8. (Character = “YES”, “NO”, or “ALL”;
Default = NO)
EPSU Error tolerance for displacement (U) criterion. See Remark 16. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 1.0E-2;)
EPSP Error tolerance for load (P) criterion. See Remark 16. (Real > 0.0; Usual
default = 1.0E-2)
EPSW Error tolerance for work (W) criterion. See Remark 16. (Real > 0.0; Usual
default = 1.0E-2)
MAXDIV Limit on probable divergence conditions per iteration before the solution is
assumed to diverge. See Remark 9. (Integer ≠ 0; Default = 3)
MAXQN Maximum number of quasi-Newton correction vectors to be saved on the
database. See Remark 10. (Integer > 0; Default = MAXITER)
Main Index
324
Field Contents
MAXLS Maximum number of line searches allowed for each iteration. See Remark 11.
(Integer > 0; Default = 4)
FSTRESS Fraction of effective stress ( σ ) used to limit the subincrement size in the material
routines. See Remark 12. (0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.2)
LSTOL Line search tolerance. See Remark 11. (0.01 < Real < 0.9; Default = 0.5)
MAXBIS Maximum number of bisections allowed for each load increment. See Remark 13.
(-10 < MAXBIS < 10; Default = 5)
MAXR Maximum ratio for the adjusted arc-length increment relative to the initial value.
See Remark 14. (1.0 < MAXR < 40.0; Default = 20.0)
RTOLB Maximum value of incremental rotation (in degrees) allowed per iteration to
activate bisection. See Remark 15. (Real > 2.0; Default = 20.0)
Remarks:
1. The NLPARM entry is selected by the Case Control command NLPARM = ID. Each
solution subcase requires an NLPARM command.
2. In cases of static analysis (DT = 0.0) using Newton methods, NINC is the number of
equal subdivisions of the load change defined for the subcase. Applied loads, gravity
loads, temperature sets, enforced displacements, etc., define the new loading
conditions. The differences from the previous case are divided by NINC to define the
incremental values. In cases of static analysis (DT = 0.0) using arc-length methods,
NINC is used to determine the initial arc-length for the subcase, and the number of load
subdivisions will not be equal to NINC. In cases of creep analysis (DT > 0.0), NINC is
the number of time step increments.
3. The unit of DT must be consistent with the unit used on the CREEP entry that defines
the creep characteristics. Total creep time for the subcase is DT multiplied by the value
in the field NINC; i.e., DT*NINC.
4. The stiffness update strategy is selected in the KMETHOD field.
• If the AUTO option is selected, the program automatically selects the most
efficient strategy based on convergence rates. At each step the number of
iterations required to converge is estimated. Stiffness is updated, if (i) estimated
number of iterations to converge exceeds MAXITER, (ii) estimated time
required for convergence with current stiffness exceeds the estimated time
required for convergence with updated stiffness, and (iii) solution diverges. See
Remarks 9. and 13. for diverging solutions.
• If the SEMI option is selected, the program for each load increment (i) performs
a single iteration based upon the new load, (ii) updates the stiffness matrix, and
(iii) resumes the normal AUTO option.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 325
Bulk Data Entries
• If the ITER option is selected, the program updates the stiffness matrix at every
KSTEP iterations and on convergence if KSTEP < MAXITER. However, if
KSTEP > MAXITER, stiffness matrix is never updated. Note that the
Newton-Raphson iteration strategy is obtained by selecting the ITER option and
KSTEP = 1, while the Modified Newton-Raphson iteration strategy is obtained
by selecting the ITER option and KSTEP = MAXITER.
5. For AUTO and SEMI options, the stiffness matrix is updated on convergence if KSTEP
is less than the number of iterations that were required for convergence with the
current stiffness.
6. The number of iterations for a load increment is limited to MAXITER. If the solution
does not converge in MAXITER iterations, the load increment is bisected and the
analysis is repeated. If the load increment cannot be bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is attained
or MAXBIS = 0) and MAXDIV is positive, the best attainable solution is computed and
the analysis is continued to the next load increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the
analysis is terminated.
7. The test flags (U = displacement error, P = load equilibrium error, and W = work error)
and the tolerances (EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW) define the convergence criteria. All the
requested criteria (combination of U, P, and/or W) are satisfied upon convergence. See
the MSC.Nastran Handbook for Nonlinear Analysis for more details on convergence
criteria.
8. INTOUT controls the output requests for displacements, element forces and stresses,
etc. YES or ALL must be specified in order to be able to perform a subsequent restart
from the middle of a subcase.
• For the Newton family of iteration methods (i.e., when no NLPCI command is
specified), the option ALL is equivalent to option YES since the computed load
increment is always equal to the user-specified load increment.
• For arc-length methods (i.e., when the NLPCI command is specified) the
computed load increment in general is not going to be equal to the
user-specified load increment, and is not known in advance. The option ALL
allows the user to obtain solutions at the desired intermediate load increments.
9. The ratio of energy errors before and after the iteration is defined as divergence rate
i
( E ) , i.e.,
i T i
i { ∆u } { R }
E = ----------------------------------------
i T i–1
{ ∆u } { R }
Main Index
326
i i 12
If E ≥ 1 or E < – 10 , then NDIV = NDIV + 2
12 i
If – 10 < E < – 1 , then NDIV = NDIV + 1
The solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV > |MAXDIV|. If the solution diverges
and the load increment cannot be further bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is attained or MAXBIS
is zero), the stiffness is updated based on the previous iteration and the analysis is
continued. If the solution diverges again in the same load increment while MAXDIV
is positive, the best solution is computed and the analysis is continued to the next load
increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the analysis is terminated on the second
divergence.
10. The BFGS update is performed if MAXQN > 0. As many as MAXQN quasi-Newton
vectors can be accumulated. The BFGS update with these QN vectors provides a secant
modulus in the search direction. If MAXQN is reached, no additional ON vectors will
be accumulated. Accumulated QN vectors are purged when the stiffness is updated
and the accumulation is resumed.
11. The line search is performed as required, if MAXLS > 0. In the line search, the
displacement increment is scaled to minimize the energy error. The line search is not
performed if the absolute value of the relative energy error is less than the value
specified in LSTOL.
12. The number of subincrements in the material routines (elastoplastic and creep) is
determined so that the subincrement size is approximately FSTRESS ⋅ σ (equivalent
stress). FSTRESS is also used to establish a tolerance for error correction in the
elastoplastic material; i.e.,
1 ∆l n
------------------ ≤ -------- ≤ MAXR
MAXR ∆l o
Main Index
CHAPTER D 327
Bulk Data Entries
where ∆l n is the arc-length at step n and ∆l o is the original arc-length. The arc-length
method for load increments is selected by an NLPCI Bulk Data entry. This entry must
have the same ID as the NLPARM Bulk Data entry.
15. The bisection is activated if the incremental rotation for any degree-of-freedom
( ∆θ x, ∆θ y, or ∆θ z ) exceeds the value specified by RTOLB. This bisection strategy is
based on the incremental rotation and controlled by MAXBIS.
16. Default tolerance sets are determined based on model type and desired accuracy.
Accuracy is under user control and can be specified on the PARAM, NLTOL entry.
NLTOL’s value is used only if the CONV, EPSU, EPSP and EPSW fields are blank, and
if NINC is set to a value of 10 or larger. Otherwise, the NLTOL selection will be
overridden. The tables below list tolerances according to NLTOL selections:
Main Index
328
Table 4-2 Default Tolerances for Static Nonlinear SOL 106 Models Without Gaps, Contact
or Heat Transfer
Table 4-3 Default Tolerances for Static Nonlinear SOL 106 Models With Gaps or Contact
(Enter NLTOL Values of 0 or 2 Only or Omit the Parameter)
Table 4-4 Default Tolerances for Static Nonlinear SOL 106 or 153 Models With Heat
Transfer (Enter NLTOL Value of 0 Only or Omit the Parameter)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 329
Bulk Data Entries
·
Function of velocity: P i ( t ) = S ⋅ T ( u j ( t ) ) Eq. 4-2
·
where u j ( t ) and u j ( t ) are the displacement and velocity at point GJ in the direction of CJ.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN1 SID GI CI S GJ CJ TID
Example:
NOLIN1 21 3 4 2.1 3 10 6
Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which nonlinear load is to be
applied. (Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra
point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for GJ according to the following table:
Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads must be selected with the Case Control command
NONLINEAR = SID.
2. Nonlinear loads may not be referenced on DLOAD entry.
Main Index
330
· u j, t – u j, t – 1
u j, t = ----------------------------------
∆t
where ∆t is the time step interval and u j, t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ for the
previous time step.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 331
Bulk Data Entries
Pi ( t ) = S ⋅ Xj ( t ) ⋅ Xk ( t )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN2 SID GI CI S GJ CJ GK CK
Example:
NOLIN2 14 2 1 2.9 2 1 2
Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which nonlinear load is to be
applied. (Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra
point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ, GK Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ, CK Component number for GJ, GK according to the following table:
Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads must be selected with the Case Control command NONLINEAR=SID.
2. Nonlinear loads may not be referenced on a DLOAD entry.
3. All degrees-of-freedom referenced on NOLIN2 entries must be members of the
solution set. This means the e-set for modal formulation and the d-set for direct
formulation.
4. GI-CI, GJ-CJ, and G
K-CK may be the same point.
Main Index
332
·
5. Nonlinear loads may be a function of displacement ( X = u ) or velocity ( X = u ) .
Velocities are denoted by a component number ten greater than the actual component
number; i.e., a component of 10 is component 0 (velocity). The velocity is determined
by
· ut – ut – 1
u t = -------------------------
∆t
where ∆t is the time step interval and u t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ or GK-CK for
the previous time step.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 333
Bulk Data Entries
S ⋅ [ X ( t ) ] A, X ( t ) > 0
Pi ( t ) = j j
0, X j ( t ) ≤ 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN3 SID GI CI S GJ CJ A
Example:
Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which the nonlinear load is to
be applied. (Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra
point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ Grid, scalar, extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for GJ according to the following table:
Main Index
334
· u j, t – u j, t – 1
u j, t = ----------------------------------
∆t
where ∆t is the time step interval and u j, t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ for the
previous time step.
5. Use a NOLIN4 entry for the negative range of X j ( t ) .
Main Index
CHAPTER D 335
Bulk Data Entries
– S ⋅ [ – X ( t ) ] A, X ( t ) < 0
Pi ( t ) = j j
0, X j ( t ) ≥ 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN4 SID GI CI S GJ CJ A
Example:
Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which nonlinear load is to be
applied. (Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra
point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for GJ according to the following table:
Main Index
336
· u j, t – u j, t – 1
u j, t = ----------------------------------
∆t
where ∆t is the time step interval and uj, t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ for the
previous time step.
X (t)
Use a NOLIN3 entry for the positive range of j .
Main Index
CHAPTER D 337
Bulk Data Entries
PARAM Parameter
Specifies values for parameters used in solution sequences or user-written DMAP programs.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PARAM N V1 V2
Example:
PARAM IRES 1
Field Contents
N Parameter name (one to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which is
alphabetic).
V1, V2 Parameter value based on parameter type, as follows:
Type V1 V2
Integer Integer Blank
Real, single-precision Real Blank
Character Character Blank
Real, double-precision Double-precision real Blank
Complex, single-precision Real or blank Real or blank
Complex, double-precision Double-precision real Double-precision real
Remarks:
1. See “Parameters” on page 601 for a list of parameters used in solution sequences that
may be set by the user on PARAM entries.
2. If the large field entry format is used, the second physical entry must be present, even
though fields 6 through 9 are blank.
Main Index
338
Specifies the free convection boundary condition properties of a boundary condition surface
element used for heat transfer analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PCONV PCONID MID FORM EXPF
Example:
PCONV 3 2 0 .25
Field Contents
PCONID Convection property identification number. (Integer > 0)
MID Material property identification number. (Integer > 0)
FORM Type of formula used for free convection. (Integer 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, or 21;
Default = 0)
EXPF Free convection exponent as implemented within the context of the particular
form that is chosen. See Remark 3. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Every surface to which free convection is to be applied must reference a PCONV entry.
PCONV is referenced on the CONV Bulk Data entry.
2. MID is used to supply the convection heat transfer coefficient (H).
3. EXPF is the free convection temperature exponent.
• If FORM = 0, 10, or 20, EXPF is an exponent of (T – TAMB), where the convective
heat transfer is represented as
EXPF
q = H ⋅ u CNTRLND ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) .
where T represents the elemental grid point temperatures and TAMB is the associated
ambient temperature.
4. FORM specifies the formula type and the reference temperature location used in
calculating the convection film coefficient if FLMND = 0.
• If FORM = 0 or 1, the reference temperature is the average of element grid point
temperatures (average) and the ambient point temperatures (average).
Main Index
CHAPTER D 339
Bulk Data Entries
Main Index
340
Specifies the forced convection boundary condition properties of a boundary condition surface
element used for heat transfer analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PCONV PCONID MID FORM FLAG COEF EXPR EXPPI EXPPO
M
Example:
Field Contents
PCONID Convection property identification number. (Integer > 0)
MID Material property identification number. (Integer > 0)
FORM Type of formula used for convection. (Integer = 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, or 21; Default = 0)
FLAG Flag for mass flow convection. (Integer = 0 or 1; Default = 0)
COEF Constant coefficient used for forced convection. (Real > 0.0)
EXPR Reynolds number convection exponent. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
EXPPI Prandtl number convection exponent for heat transfer into the working fluid.
(Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
EXPPO Prandtl number convection exponent for heat transfer out of the working fluid.
(Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Every surface to which forced convection is applied must reference a PCONVM entry.
PCONVM is referenced on the CONVM entry.
2. MID specifies material properties of the working fluid at the temperature of the point
FLMND. FLMND is specified on the CONVM entry.
3. The material properties are used in conjunction with the average diameter and mass
flow rate (mdot). MID references the material properties and supplies the fluid
conductivity (k), heat capacity (cp), and viscosity ( µ ) needed to compute the Reynolds
(Re) and Prandtl (Pr) numbers as follows:
Re = 4 ⋅ mdot ⁄ ( π ⋅ diameter ⋅ µ )
Pr = cp ⋅ µ ⁄ k
4. FORM controls the type of formula used in determination of the forced convection film
coefficient h. There are two cases:
Main Index
CHAPTER D 341
Bulk Data Entries
EXPR EXPP
• If FORM = 0, 10, or 20 than h = coef ⋅ Re ⋅ Pr .
• If FORM = 1, 11, or 21 then the above h is multiplied by k and divided by the
average hydraulic diameter.
• FORM also specifies the reference temperature used in calculating material
properties for the fluid if FLMND = 0.
• If FORM = 0 or 1, the reference temperature is the average of element grid point
temperatures (average) and the ambient point temperature (average).
• If FORM = 10 or 11, the reference temperature is the surface temperature
(average of element grid point temperatures).
• If FORM = 20 or 21, the reference temperature is the ambient temperature
(average of ambient point temperature).
5. In the above expression, EXPP is EXPPI or EXPPO, respectively, for heat flowing into
or out of the working fluid. This determination is performed internally.
6. FLAG controls the convective heat transfer into the downstream point (the second
point as identified on the CHBDYi statement is downstream if mdot is positive).
• FLAG = 0, no convective flow (stationary fluid).
• FLAG = 1, convective energy flow that is consistent with the Streamwise
Upwind Petrov Galerkin (SUPG) element formulation.
7. No phase change or internal heat generation capabilities exist for this element.
Main Index
342
Specifies the damping value of a scalar damper element using defined CDAMP1 or CDAMP3
entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PDAMP PID1 B1 PID2 B2 PID3 B3 PID4 B4
Example:
Field Contents
PIDi Property identification number. (Integer > 0)
Bi Force per unit velocity. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Damping values are defined directly on the CDAMP2 and CDAMP4 entries, and
therefore do not require a PDAMP entry.
2. A structural viscous damper, CVISC, may also be used for geometric grid points.
3. Up to four damping properties may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 343
Bulk Data Entries
Defines the damping multiplier and references the material properties for damping. CDAMP5
is intended for heat transfer analysis only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PDAMP5 PID MID B
Example:
PDAMP5 2 3 4.0
Field Contents
PID Property identification number. (Integer > 0)
MID Material identification number of a MAT4 or MAT5 entry. (Integer > 0)
B Damping multiplier. (Real > 0.0)
Remark:
1. B is the mass that multiplies the heat capacity CP on the MAT4 or MAT5 entry.
Main Index
344
Specifies the stiffness, damping coefficient, and stress coefficient of a scalar elastic (spring)
element (CELAS1 or CELAS3 entry).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PELAS PID1 K1 GE1 S1 PID2 K2 GE2 S2
Example:
Field Contents
PIDi Property identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ki Elastic property value. (Real)
GEi Damping coefficient, g e . See Remarks 5. and 6. (Real)
Si Stress coefficient. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Be careful using negative spring values.
2. Spring values are defined directly on the CELAS2 and CELAS4 entries, and therefore
do not require a PELAS entry.
3. One or two elastic spring properties may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of scalar elements, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi,
CDAMPi)” on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
5. If PARAM,W4 is not specified, GEi is ignored in transient analysis. See “Parameters”
on page 601.
6. To obtain the damping coefficient GE, multiply the critical damping ratio C ⁄ C 0 by 2.0.
7. If PELAS is used in conjunction with PELAST, Ki > 0, and the initial slope of the
nonlinear force-displacement relationship defined by the PELAST should agree with
Ki.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 345
Bulk Data Entries
A property entry referenced by CHBDYP entries to give auxiliary geometric information for
boundary condition surface elements.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PHBDY PID AF D1 D2
Example:
Field Contents
PID Property identification number. (Unique Integer among all PHBDY entries).
(Integer > 0)
AF Area factor of the surface used only for CHBDYP element TYPE = “POINT”,
TYPE = “LINE”, TYPE = “TUBE”, or TYPE = “ELCYL”. For TYPE = “TUBE”, AF
is the constant thickness of the hollow tube. (Real>0.0 or blank)
D1, D2 Diameters associated with the surface. Used with CHBDYP element
TYPE = “ELCYL”, “TUBE”, and “FTUBE”. (Real > 0.0 or blank; Default for
D2 = D1)
Remarks:
1. The PHBDY entry is used with CHBDYP entries.
2. AF
• For TYPE = “POINT” surfaces, AF is the area.
• For TYPE = “LINE” or TYPE = “ELCYL” surfaces, AF is the effective width:
area = AF ⋅ ( length ) .
• For TYPE = “FTUBE” and outer TYPE = “TUBE” surfaces
D1 – D2 2
area = π ⋅ ----------------------- ⋅ ( LGTH ) + ----------------------
D1 + D2 2
2 2
3. D1 and D2 are used only with TYPE = “ELCYL”, TYPE = “TUBE”, and
TYPE = “FTUBE” surfaces.
• For TYPE = “ELCYL” surfaces, D1 and D2 are the two diameters associated with
the ellipse.
• For TYPE = “FTUBE” and outer TYPE = “TUBE” surfaces, D1 and D2 are the
diameters associated with the first and second grid points, respectively.
Main Index
346
• For inner TYPE = “TUBE” surfaces, the diameters are reduced by twice the
thickness ( 2 ⋅ AF ) .
Main Index
CHAPTER D 347
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QBDY1 SID Q0 EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Q0 Heat flux into element. (Real)
EIDi CHBDYj element identification numbers. (Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”. For “THRU”
option EID2 > EID1.)
Remarks:
1. QBDY1 entries must be selected with the Case Control command LOAD = SID in order
to be used in static analysis. The total power into an element is given by the equation:
P in = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0
2. QBDY1 entries must be referenced on a TLOAD entry for use in transient analysis. The
total power into an element is given by the equation:
P in ( t ) = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ F ( t – τ )
Main Index
348
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QBDY2 SID EID Q01 Q02 Q03 Q04 Q05 Q06
Q07 Q08
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer >0)
EID Identification number of an CHBDYj element. (Integer > 0)
Q0i Heat flux at the i-th grid point on the referenced CHBDYj element. (Real or
blank)
Remarks:
1. QBDY2 entries must be selected with the Case Control command LOAD=SID in order
to be used in static analysis. The total power into each point i on an element is given by
P i = AREA i ⋅ Q0i
2. QBDY2 entries must be referenced on a TLOAD entry for use in transient analysis. All
connected grid points will have the same time function but may have individual
delays. The total power into each point i on an element is given by
P i ( t ) = AREA i ⋅ Q0i ⋅ F ( t – τ i )
Main Index
CHAPTER D 349
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QBDY3 SID Q0 CNTRLN EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5
D
EID6 etc.
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Q0 Thermal heat flux load, or load multiplier. Q0 is positive for heat flow into a
surface. (Real)
CNTRLND Control point for thermal flux load. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi CHBDYj element identification numbers. (Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU” or “BY”)
Remarks:
1. QBDY3 entries must be selected in Case Control (LOAD = SID) to be used in steady
state. The total power into a surface is given by the equation:
• if CNTRLND ≤ 0 then P in = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0
• if CNTRLND > 0 then P in = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ u CNTRLND
where u CNTRLND is the temperature of the control point and is used as a load
multiplier.
2. In transient analysis SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry through the
DAREA entry. A function of time F ( t – τ ) defined on the TLOADi multiplies the
general load, with τ specifying time delay. The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry
must be selected in Case Control (DLOAD = SID) for use in transient analysis. If
multiple types of transient loads exist, they must be combined by the DLOAD Bulk
Data entry.
3. The CNTRLND multiplier cannot be used with any higher-order elements.
4. When using “THRU” or “BY”, all intermediate CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP
elements must exist.
Main Index
350
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QHBDY SID FLAG Q0 AF G1 G2 G3 G4
G5 G6 G7 G8
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
FLAG Type of face involved (must be one of the following: “POINT”, “LINE”, “REV”,
“AREA3", “AREA4", “AREA6", “AREA8")
Q0 Magnitude of thermal flux into face. Q0 is positive for heat into the surface. (Real)
AF Area factor depends on type. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
Gi Grid point identification of connected grid points. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. The continuation entry is optional.
2. For use in steady state analysis, the load set is selected in the Case Control Section
(LOAD = SID).
3. In transient analysis SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry through the
DAREA entry. A function of time defined on the TLOADi entry multiplies the general
load. specifies time delay. The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry must be
selected in Case Control (DLOAD = SID) for use in transient analysis. If multiple types
of transient loads exist, they must be combined by the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
4. The heat flux applied to the area is transformed to loads on the points. These points
need not correspond to an HBDY surface element.
5. The flux is applied to each point i by the equation
P i = AREA i ⋅ Q0
6. The number of connected points for the types are 1 (POINT), 2 (LINE, REV), 3 (AREA3),
4 (AREA4), 4-6 (AREA6), 5-8 (AREA8).
7. The area factor AF is used to determine the effective area for the POINT and LINE
types. It equals the area and effective width, respectively. It is not used for the other
types, which have their area defined implicitly and must be left blank.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 351
Bulk Data Entries
8. The type of face (FLAG) defines a surface in the same manner as the CHBDYi data
entry. For physical descriptions of the geometry involved, see the CHBDYG
discussion.
Main Index
352
Defines thermal vector flux from a distant source into a face of one or more CHBDYi boundary
condition surface elements.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QVECT SID Q0 TSOUR CE E1 or E2 or E3 or CNTRLND
TID1 TID2 TID3
Example:
20 21 22 23
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Q0 Magnitude of thermal flux vector into face. (Real or blank)
TSOUR Temperature of the radiant source. (Real or blank)
CE Coordinate system identification number for thermal vector flux. (Integer > 0 or
blank)
Ei Vector components (direction cosines in coordinate system CE) of the thermal
vector flux. (Real; Default = 0.0)
TIDi TABLEDi entry identification numbers defining the components as a function of
time. (Integer > 0)
CNTRLND Control point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi Element identification number of a CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP entry.
(Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”)
Remarks:
1. The continuation entry is required.
2. If the coordinate system CE is not rectangular, then the thermal vector flux is in
different directions for different CHBDYi elements. The direction of the thermal vector
flux over an element is aligned to be in the direction of the flux vector at the geometric
center of the element. The geometric center is measured using the grid points and
includes any DISLIN specification on the VIEW entry for TYPE=LINE CHBDYi
elements. The flux is presumed to be uniform over the face of each element; i.e., the
source is relatively distant.
3. For use in steady-state analysis, the load set is selected in the Case Control Section
(LOAD = SID). The total power into an element is given by:
Main Index
CHAPTER D 353
Bulk Data Entries
• If CNTRLND = 0 then, P in = – αA ( e ⋅ n ) ⋅ Q0 .
• If CNTRLND > 0 then, P in = – αA ( e ⋅ n ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ u CNTRLND .
where
4. If the absorptivity is constant, its value is supplied by the ABSORP field on the RADM
entry. If the absorptivity is not a constant, the thermal flux is assumed to have a
wavelength distribution of a black body at the temperature TSOUR.
• For a temperature-dependent absorptivity, the element temperature is used to
determine α .
• For a wavelength-dependent absorptivity, the integration of the flux times α is
computed for each wavelength band. The sum of the integrated thermal fluxes
over all the wavelength bands is Q0. The wave bands are specified with the
RADBND entry.
• The user has the responsibility of enforcing Kirchhoff’s laws.
5. In transient analysis, SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry through the
DAREA specification. A function of time F ( t – τ ) defined on the TLOADi entry
multiplies the general load. τ provides any required time delay. F ( t – τ ) is a function
of time specified on the TLOADi entry. The value of is calculated for each loaded grid
point. The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry must be selected in Case Control
(DLOAD = SID) for use in transient analysis. If multiple types of transient loads exist,
they must be combined by the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
The total power into an element is given by:
• If CNTRLND = 0 then, P in = – αA ( e ( t ) ⋅ n ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ F ( t – τ ) .
• If CNTRLND > 0 then,
P in = – αA ( e ( t ) ⋅ n ) ⋅ F ( t – τ ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ u CNTRLND .
6. If the referenced face is of TYPE = ELCYL, the power input is an exact integration over
the area exposed to the thermal flux vector.
7. If the referenced face is of TYPE = REV, the thermal flux vector must be parallel to the
axis of symmetry if an axisymmetric boundary condition is to be maintained.
Main Index
354
8. When applied to a surface element associated with a radiation enclosure cavity, any
incident energy that is not absorbed ( α < 1.0 ) is lost from the system and is not
accounted for in a reflective sense ( α + ρ = 1.0 ) .
Main Index
CHAPTER D 355
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QVOL SID QVOL CNTRLN EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5
D
EID6 etc.
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification. (Integer > 0)
QVOL Power input per unit volume produced by a heat conduction element. (Real)
CNTRLND Control point used for controlling heat generation. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi A list of heat conduction elements. (Integer > 0 or “THRU” or “BY”)
Remarks:
1. EIDi has material properties (MAT4) that include HGEN, the element material
property for heat generation, which may be temperature dependent. This association
is made through the element EID. If HGEN is temperature dependent, it is based on
the average element temperature.
2. QVOL provides either the constant volumetric heat generation rate or the load
multiplier. QVOL is positive for heat generation. For steady-state analysis, the total
power into an element is
• If CNTRLND = 0, then P in = volume ⋅ HGEN ⋅ QVOL .
• If CNTRLND > 0, then P in = volume ⋅ HGEN ⋅ QVOL ⋅ u CNTRLND .
where u CNTRLND is the temperature multiplier.
3. For use in steady-state analysis, the load set is selected in the Case Control Section
(LOAD = SID).
4. In transient analysis SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry. A function of
time F [ t – τ ] defined on the TLOADi entry multiplies the general load where τ
specifies time delay. The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry must be selected in
Case Control (DLOAD = SID) for use in transient analysis. If multiple types of transient
loads exist, they must be combined by the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
5. For “THRU” or “BY”, all intermediate referenced heat conduction elements must exist.
6. The CNTRLND multiplier cannot be used with any higher-order elements.
Main Index
356
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADBC NODAMB FAMB CNTRLND EID1 EID2 EID3 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
NODAMB Ambient point for radiation exchange. (Integer > 0)
FAMB Radiation view factor between the face and the ambient point. (Real > 0.0)
CNTRLND Control point for radiation boundary condition. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi CHBDYi element identification number. ( Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU” or “BY”)
Remarks:
1. The basic exchange relationship is:
4 4
• if CNTRLND = 0, then q = σ ⋅ FAMB ⋅ ( ε e T e – α e T amb )
• if CNTRLND > 0, then
4 4
q = σ ⋅ FAMB ⋅ u CNTRLND ⋅ ( ε e T e – α e T amb )
2. NODAMB is treated as a black body with its own ambient temperature for radiation
exchange between the surface element and space. No surface element that is a member
of a radiation enclosure cavity may also have a radiation boundary condition applied
to it.
3. Two PARAM entries are required when stipulating radiation heat transfer:
• ABS defines the absolute temperature scale; this value is added internally to any
specified temperature given in the problem. Upon solution completion, this
value is subtracted internally from the solution vector.
• SIGMA ( σ ) is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
4. RADBC allows for surface radiation to space in the absence of any cavity behavior. The
emissivity and absorptivity are supplied from a RADM entry.
5. When using “THRU” or “BY”, all intermediate referenced CHBDYi surface elements
must exist.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 357
Bulk Data Entries
Specifies Planck’s second radiation constant and the wavelength breakpoints used for radiation
exchange problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADBND NUMBER PLANCK2 LAMBDA1 LAMBDA2 LAMBDA3 LAMBDA4 LAMBDA5 LAMBDA6
LAMBDA7 etc.
Example:
Field Contents
NUMBER Number of radiation wave bands. See Remarks. (Integer > 1)
PLANCK2 Planck’s second radiation constant. See Remarks. (Real > 0.0)
LAMBDAi Highest wavelength of the i-th wave band. See Remarks. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Only one RADBND entry may be specified in the Bulk Data Section and must always
be used in conjunction with the RADM entry.
2. PLANCK2 has the units of wavelength times temperature. The same units of length
must be used for LAMBDAi as for PLANCK2. The units of temperature must be the
same as those used for the radiating surfaces. For example:
25898.µm °R or 14388.µm °K .
3. The first wavelength band extends from 0 to LAMBDA1 and the last band extends from
LAMBDAn to infinity, where n = NUMBER – 1 .
4. Discontinuous segments in the emissivity versus wavelength piecewise linear curve
must be treated as a wavelength band of zero width.
5. LAMBDAi must be specified in ascending order, and all LAMBDAi fields where i is
greater than or equal to NUMBER must be blank.
Main Index
358
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADCAV ICAVITY ELEAMB SHADOW SCALE PRTPCH NFECI RMAX NREV
Example:
RADCAV 1 1 .99
3 5 4 5 7 5
Field Contents
ICAVITY Unique cavity identification number associated with enclosure radiation. (Integer
> 0)
ELEAMB CHBDYi surface element identification number for radiation if the view factors
add up to less than 1.0. (Unique Integer > 0 among all CHBDYi elements or blank.)
SHADOW Flag to control third body shading calculation during view factor calculation for
each identified cavity. (Character = “YES” or “NO”; Default = “YES”)
SCALE View factor that the enclosure sum will be set to if a view factor is greater than 1.0.
(0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.0)
PRTPCH Facilitates the blocking of view factor printing and punching onto RADLST
and RADMTX entries. (Integer = 0, 1, 2, or 3; Default = 0):
PRTPCH Print/Punch
0 (default) print and punch
1 no print
2 no punch
3 no print or punch
NFECI Controls whether finite difference or contour integration methods are to be used
in the calculation of view factors in the absence of a VIEW3D Bulk Data entry.
(Character = “FD” or “CONT”; See Remark 4. for default.)
RMAX Subelement area factor. See Remark 5. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.1)
NREV Number of computational elements used in determination of axisymmetric view
factors. See Remark 8. (Integer > 0; Default = 31)
SETij Set identification pairs for the calculation of global view factors. Up to 30 pairs
may be specified (i = 1 to 2 and j = 1 to 30). (Integer > 0)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 359
Bulk Data Entries
Remarks:
1. For the surfaces of an incomplete enclosure (view factors add up to less than 1.0), a
complete enclosure may be achieved (SUM = 1.0) by specifying an ambient element,
ELEAMB. When multiple cavities are defined, each cavity must have a unique ambient
element if ambient elements are desired. No elements can be shared between cavities.
2. Third-body shadowing is ignored in the cavity if SHADOW = “NO”. In particular, if it
is known a priori that there is no third-body shadowing, SHADOW = NO overrides
KSHD and KBSHD fields on the VIEW Bulk Data entry as well as reduces the
calculation time immensely.
3. The view factors for a complete enclosure may add up to slightly more than 1.0 due to
calculation inaccuracies. SCALE can be used to adjust all the view factors
proportionately to acquire a summation equal to the value specified for SCALE. If
SCALE is left blank or set to 0.0, no scaling is performed.
4. If the VIEW3D Bulk Data entry is not specified, the view factors are calculated using
finite difference and contour integration methods. If NFECI = “FD”, then all view
factors are calculated using the finite difference technique. NFECI = “CONT” invokes
contour integration for all view factor calculations. If NFECI is blank, the program
selects a method to use between any two particular elements based on RMAX.
2
5. The comparison value for RMAX is equal to A s ⁄ d rs where A s is the area of a
subelement and d rs is the distance between two subelements r and s for which view
factors are being computed. When NFECI is blank, the program selects the contour
2
integral method only if A s ⁄ d rs > RMAX .
6. When a number of elements are grouped together and considered as a conglomerate
surface, view factors can be calculated between these groups. These are referred to as
global view factors. The SET1 Bulk Data entry is used to define the conglomerate.
When using this feature, negative EIDs are not allowed.
7. If a RADLST and RADMTX entry exists for this cavity ID, new view factors are not
computed and the existing RADLST and RADMTX are used in the thermal analysis.
8. The VIEW3D Bulk Data entry must be specified for the calculation of axisymmetric
view factors. The process relies on the internal construction of a semi-circle of
computational elements. NREV specifies the number of such elements desired.
Main Index
360
Identifies the individual CHBDYi surface elements that comprise the entire radiation enclosure.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADLST ICAVITY MTXTYP EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6
EID7 -etc.-
Example:
RADLST 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Field Contents
ICAVITY Unique cavity identification number that links a radiation exchange matrix with its
listing of enclosure radiation faces. (Integer > 0)
MTXTYP Type of radiation exchange matrix used for this cavity. (Integer < 4 and ≠ 0;
Default = 1 for an enclosure without an ambient element. Default = 4 for an
enclosure with an ambient element as specified on the RADCAV entry.)
1: Symmetric view factor matrix [F] and nonconservative radiation matrix [R].
2: Symmetric exchange factor matrix [ ℑ ] and conservative radiation matrix
[R].
3: Unsymmetric exchange factor matrix [ ℑ ] and conservative radiation
matrix [R].
4: Symmetric view factor matrix [F] and conservative radiation matrix [R].
-n: The first n CHBDYi elements may lose energy to space but the remainder
may not. Symmetric exchange factor matrix [F] and nonconservative
radiation matrix [R].
EIDi Identification numbers for the CHBDYi elements in this radiation cavity.
(Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”)
Remarks:
1. A radiation EIDi list isolates those CHBDYi surface element faces that are to
communicate in a radiation enclosure. View-factor calculation and RADMTX
formation for an enclosure is performed only for (or among) those faces identified
within the same RADCAV.
2. A radiation exchange matrix (RADMTX) can only reference one radiative face list
(RADLST). The companion RADCAV, RADLST, and RADMTX must share a unique
ICAVITY.
3. For each EIDi, the appropriate CHBDYi element is located, and the proper RADM
entry ID field found.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 361
Bulk Data Entries
4. If the radiation exchange matrix or any radiation boundary conditions are available
from an external source, the RADMTX must be user generated.
5. Multiple RADLST entries may be specified.
6. If any RADLST entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis may
be performed. Therefore, RADLST entry changes or additions are not recommended on
restart.
Main Index
362
Defines the radiation properties of a boundary element for heat transfer analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2 EMIS3 EMIS4 EMIS5 EMIS6
EMIS7 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
RADMID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
ABSORP Surface absorptivity or the temperature function curve multiplier if ABSORP is
variable. See Remark 2. (0.0 < Real < 1.0)
EMISi Surface emissivity at wavelength LAMBDAi or the temperature function curve
multiplier if EMISi is variable (See the RADBND entry.) (0.0 < Real < 1.0)
Remarks:
1. The RADM entry is directly referenced only by one of the CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or
CHBDYP type surface element entries.
2. For radiation enclosure problems, ABSORP is set equal to emissivity. For QVECT
loads, absorptivity is specified by ABSORP.
3. If there is more than one EMISi, then:
• There must be a RADBND entry.
• The number of EMISi may not exceed the number of LAMBDAi on the
RADBND entry.
• The emissivity values are given for a wavelength specified by the corresponding
LAMBDAi on the RADBND entry. Within each discrete wavelength band, the
emissivity is assumed to be constant.
• At any specific wavelength and surface temperature, the absorptivity is exactly
equal to the emissivity.
4. To perform any radiation heat transfer exchange, the user must furnish PARAM entries
for:
• TABS to define the absolute temperature scale.
• SIGMA ( σ ) to define the Stefan-Boltzmann constant in appropriate units.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 363
Bulk Data Entries
Specifies table references for temperature dependent RADM entry radiation boundary
properties.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADMT RADMI T(A) T( ε 1) T( ε 2) T( ε 3) T( ε 4) T( ε 5) T( ε 6)
D
T( ε 7) -etc.-
Example:
RADMT 11 1 2 3 4 5 6
Field Contents
RADMID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
T(A) TABLEMj identifier for surface absorptivity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T ( εi ) TABLEMj identifiers for surface emissivity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. The basic quantities on the RADM entry of the same RADMID are always multiplied
by the corresponding tabular function.
2. Tables T(A) and T ( ε i ) have an upper bound that is less than or equal to one and a lower
bound that is greater than or equal to zero.
3. The TABLEMj enforces the element temperature as the independent variable. Blank or
zero fields means there is no temperature dependence of the referenced property on the
RADM entry.
Main Index
364
Provides the F ji = A j f ji exchange factors for all the faces of a radiation enclosure specified in
the corresponding RADLST entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADMTX ICAVITY INDEX Fi,j Fi+1,j Fi+2,j Fi+3,j Fi+4,j Fi+5,j
Fi+6,j -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
ICAVITY Unique cavity identification number that links a radiation exchange matrix with its
listing of enclosure radiation surface elements. (Integer > 0)
INDEX Column number in the matrix. (Integer > 0)
Fk,j If symmetric, the matrix values start on the diagonal (i = j) and continue down the
column (k = i + 1, i + 2, etc.). If unsymmetric, the values start in row (i = 1). i refers
to EIDi on the RADLST entry. (Real > 0)
Remarks:
1. If the matrix is symmetric, only the lower triangle is input, and i = j = INDEX. If the
matrix is unsymmetric, i = 1, and j = INDEX.
2. Only one ICAVITY may be referenced for those faces that are to be included in a unique
radiation matrix.
3. Coefficients are listed by column with the number of columns equal to the number of
entries in the RADLST.
4. All faces involved in any radiation enclosure must be defined with an CHBDYi
element.
5. If any RADMTX entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis may
be performed. Therefore, RADMTX entry changes or additions are not recommended
on restart.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 365
Bulk Data Entries
Specifies which radiation cavities are to be included for radiation enclosure analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADSET ICAVITY1 ICAVITY2 ICAVITY3 ICAVITY4 ICAVITY5 ICAVITY6 ICAVITY7 ICAVITY8
ICAVITY9 -etc.-
Example:
RADSET 1 2 3 4
Field Contents
ICAVITYi Unique identification number for a cavity to be considered for enclosure radiation
analysis. (Integer > 0)
Remark:
1. For multiple radiation cavities, RADSET specifies which cavities are to be included in
the analysis.
Main Index
366
Defines a list of structural grid points for aerodynamic analysis, XY-plots for SORT1 output, and
the PANEL entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SET1 SID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7
G8 -etc.-
Example:
SET1 3 31 62 93 124 16 17 18
19
SET1 6 32 THRU 50
Field Contents
SID Unique identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gi List of structural grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for the
“THRU” option, G1 < G2 or “SKIN”; in field 3)
Remarks:
1. SET1 entries may be referenced by the SPLINEi entries, PANEL entries and
XYOUTPUT requests.
2. When using the “THRU” option for SPLINEi or PANEL data entries, all intermediate
grid points must exist.
3. When using the “THRU” option for XYOUTPUT requests, missing grid points are
ignored.
4. When using the “SKIN” option, MSC.Nastran will generate a panel consisting of the
structural portion of the fluid-structural boundary.
5. When the SET1 entry is used in conjunction with the ACMODL entry, under rules
defined on the ACMODL entry, the Gi may be a list of element IDs.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 367
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SLOAD SID S1 F1 S2 F2 S3 F3
Example:
Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Si Scalar or grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Fi Load magnitude. (Real)
Remarks:
1. In the static solution sequences, the load set ID (SID) is selected by the Case Control
command LOAD. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced in the
LID field of an LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control
command LOADSET.
2. Up to three loads may be defined on a single entry.
3. If Si refers to a grid point, the load is applied to component T1 of the displacement
coordinate system (see the CD field on the GRID entry).
Main Index
368
Defines a set of single-point constraints and enforced motion (enforced displacements in static
analysis and enforced displacements, velocities or acceleration in dynamic analysis).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPC SID G1 C1 D1 G2 C2 D2
Example:
SPC 2 32 3 -2.6 5
Field Contents
SID Identification number of the single-point constraint set. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; up to six Unique Integers, 1 through 6, may
be placed in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1
through 6 applies to grid points.)
Di Value of enforced motion for all degrees-of-freedom designated by Gi and Ci.
(Real)
Remarks:
1. Single-point constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command SPC =
SID.
2. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the mutually exclusive
s-set. They may not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets.
See “Degree-of-Freedom Sets” on page 843 for a list of these entries.
3. Single-point forces of constraint are recovered during stress data recovery.
4. From 1 to 12 degrees-of-freedom may be specified on a single entry.
5. Degrees-of-freedom on this entry may be redundantly specified as permanent
constraints using the PS field on the GRID entry.
6. For reasons of efficiency, the SPCD entry is the preferred method for applying enforced
motion rather than the Di field described here.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 369
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPC1 SID C G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 -etc.-
Example:
SPC1 3 2 1 3 10 9 6 5
2 8
Field Contents
SID Identification number of single-point constraint set. (Integer > 0)
C Component numbers. (Any unique combination of the Integers 1 through 6 with
no embedded blanks for grid points. This number must be Integer 0 or blank for
scalar points.)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; For “THRU”
option, G1 < G2.)
Remarks:
1. Single-point constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command SPC =
SID.
2. Enforced displacements are available via this entry when used with the recommended
SPCD entry.
3. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the mutually exclusive
s-set. They may not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets.
See “Degree-of-Freedom Sets” on page 843 for a list of these entries.
4. Degrees-of-freedom on this entry may be redundantly specified as permanent
constraints using the PS field on the GRID entry.
5. If the alternate format is used, points in the sequence G1 through G2 are not required
to exist. Points that do not exist will collectively produce a warning message but will
otherwise be ignored.
Main Index
370
Defines a single-point constraint set as a union of single-point constraint sets defined on SPC or
SPC1 entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPCADD SID S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
S8 S9 -etc.-
Example:
SPCADD 101 3 2 9 1
Field Contents
SID Single-point constraint set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Si Identification numbers of single-point constraint sets defined via SPC or by SPC1
entries. (Integer > 0; SID ≠ Si)
Remarks:
1. Single-point constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command SPC =
SID.
2. No Si may be the identification number of a single-point constraint set defined by
another SPCADD entry.
3. The Si values must be unique.
4. SPCADD entries take precedence over SPC or SPC1 entries. If both have the same set
ID, only the SPCADD entry will be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 371
Bulk Data Entries
Defines an enforced displacement value for static analysis and an enforced motion value
(displacement, velocity or acceleration) in dynamic analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPCD SID G1 C1 D1 G2 C2 D2
Example:
Field Contents
SID Set identification number of the SPCD entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification number. (integer > 0)
Ci Component numbers. (0 < Integer < 6; up to six unique Integers may be placed in
the field with no embedded blanks.)
Di Value of enforced motion for at Gi and Ci. (Real)
Remarks:
1. In the static solution sequences, the set ID of the SPCD entry (SID) is selected by the
LOAD Case Control command.
2. In dynamic analysis, the selection of SID is determined by the presence of the
LOADSET request in Case Control as follows:
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
SID is selected by the EXCITEID ID of an RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1 or
TLOAD2 Bulk Data entry that has enforced motion specified in its TYPE field
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
SID is selected by LID in the selected LSEQ entries that correspond to the
EXCITEID entry of an RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 Bulk Data
entry that has enforced motion specified in its TYPE field.
3. A global coordinate (Gi and CI) referenced on this entry must also be referenced on a
SPC or SPC1 Bulk Data entry and selected by the SPC Case Control command.
4. Values of Di will override the values specified on an SPC Bulk Data entry, if the SID is
selected as indicated above.
5. The LOAD Bulk Data entry will not combine an SPCD load entry.
6. In static analysis, this method of applying enforced displacements is more efficient
than the SPC entry when more than one enforced displacement condition is applied. It
provides equivalent answers.
Main Index
372
7. In dynamic analysis, this direct method of specifying enforced motion is more accurate,
efficient and elegant than the large mass and Lagrange multiplier techniques.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 373
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPOINT ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8
Example:
SPOINT 3 18 1 4 16 2
Field Contents
IDi Scalar point identification number. (0 < Integer < 100000000; For “THRU” option,
ID1 < ID2)
Remarks:
1. A scalar point defined by its appearance on the connection entry for a scalar element
(see the CELASi, CMASSi, and CDAMPi entries) need not appear on an SPOINT entry.
2. All scalar point identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other
structural, scalar, and fluid points. However, duplicate scalar point identification
numbers are allowed in the input.
3. This entry is used primarily to define scalar points appearing in single-point or
multipoint constraint equations to which no scalar elements are connected.
4. If the alternate format is used, all scalar points ID1 through ID2 are defined.
5. For a discussion of scalar points, see “Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi)”
on page 193 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
Main Index
374
Defines determinate reaction degrees-of-freedom in free bodies for conical shell analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPAX RID1 HID1 C1 RID2 HID2 C2
Example:
SUPAX 4 3 2
Field Contents
RIDi Ring identification number. (Integer > 0)
HIDi Harmonic identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Conical shell degree-of-freedom numbers. (Any unique combination of the
Integers 1 through 6.)
Remarks:
1. SUPAX is allowed only if an AXIC entry is also present.
2. Up to 12 degrees-of-freedom may appear on a single entry.
3. Degrees-of-freedom appearing on SUPAX entries may not appear on MPCAX, SPCAX,
or OMITAX entries.
4. For a discussion of conical shell analysis, see “Conical Shell Element (RINGAX)” on
page 155 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 375
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED1 TID XAXIS YAXIS
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.- “ENDT”
Example:
TABLED1 32
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
XAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the x-axis. See Remark 6.
(Character: “LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
YAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the y-axis. See Remark 6.
(Character: “LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
“ENDT” Flag indicating the end of the table.
Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points
or two end points. For example, in Figure 4-9 discontinuities are allowed only between
points x2 through x7. Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value
of y is used. In Figure 4-9, the value of y at x=x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 . If the y-axis is a
LOG axis then the jump at the discontinuity is evaluated as y = y3y4 .
3. At least one continuation must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing the character string “SKIP” in either of the
two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of the character string “ENDT” in
either of the two fields following the last entry. An error is detected if any
continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLED1 uses the algorithm
y = yT ( x )
Main Index
376
where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using
interpolation within the table and extrapolation outside the table using the two starting
or end points. See Figure 4-9. The algorithms used for interpolation or extrapolation
are:
LOG LOG ln ( xj ⁄ x ) ln ( x ⁄ xi )
exp -------------------------- ln yi + -------------------------- ln yi
ln ( xj ⁄ xi ) ln ( xj ⁄ xi )
x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2
x
x1 x2 x3, x5 x6 x7,
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated
7. Linear extrapolation is not used for Fourier transform methods. The function is zero
outside the range of the table.
8. For frequency-dependent loads, xi is measured in cycles per unit time.
9. Tabular values on an axis if XAXIS or YAXIS = LOG must be positive. A fatal message
will be issued if an axis has a tabular value < 0.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 377
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
Example:
TABLED2 15 -10.5
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1 Table parameter. See Remark 6. (Real)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points
or two end points. For example, in Figure 4-10 discontinuities are allowed only
between points x2 and x7. Also if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average
value of y is used. In Figure 4-10, the value of y at x=x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields
following the last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry
containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLED2 uses the algorithm
y = y T ( x – X1 )
where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using
linear interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table using the
two starting or end points. See Figure 4-10. No warning messages are issued if table
data is input incorrectly.
Main Index
378
x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2
x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated
7. Linear extrapolation is not used for Fourier transform methods. The function is zero
outside the range of the table.
8. For frequency-dependent loads, X1 and xi are measured in cycles per unit time.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 379
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED3 TID X1 X2
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1, X2 Table parameters. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points
or two end points. For example, in Figure 4-11 discontinuities are allowed only
between points x2 and x7. Also if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average
value of y is used. In Figure 4-11, the value of y at x=x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be present.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields
following the last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry
containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLED3 uses the algorithm
y = y T -----------------
x – X1
X2
where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using
interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table using the two
starting or end points. See Figure 4-11. No warning messages are issued if table data
is input incorrectly.
Main Index
380
x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2
x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated
7. Linear extrapolation is not used for Fourier transform methods. The function is zero
outside the range of the table.
8. For frequency-dependent loads, X1, X2, and xi are measured in cycles per unit time.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 381
Bulk Data Entries
Defines the coefficients of a power series for use in generating frequency-dependent and
time-dependent dynamic loads. Also contains parametric data for use with the table.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED4 TID X1 X2 X3 X4
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
Xi Table parameters. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0; X3<X4)
Ai Coefficients. (Real)
Remarks:
1. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
2. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in the field following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the
end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
3. TABLED4 uses the algorithm
N
i
Ai -----------------
x – X1
y = ∑ X2
i = 0
where x is input to the table, y is returned, and N is the number of pairs. Whenever
x < X3, use X3 for x; whenever x > X4, use X4 for x. There are N + 1 entries in the table.
There are no error returns from this table look-up procedure.
4. For frequency-dependent loads, xi is measured in cycles per unit time.
Main Index
382
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM1 TID XAXIS YAXIS
xI y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.- “ENDT”
Example:
TABLEM1 32
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
XAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the x-axis. See Remark 6.
(Character: “LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
YAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the y-axis. See Remark 6.
(Character: “LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
“ENDT” Flag indicating the end of the table.
Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points
or two end points. For example, in Figure 4-12 discontinuities are allowed only
between points x2 through x7. Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the
average value of y is used. In Figure 4-12, the value of y at x = x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields
following the last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry
containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLEM1 uses the algorithm
y = yT ( x )
where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using
linear interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table using the
two starting or end points. See Figure 4-12. The algorithms used for interpolation or
Main Index
extrapolation are:
CHAPTER D 383
Bulk Data Entries
LOG LOG ln ( xj ⁄ x ) ln ( x ⁄ xi )
exp -------------------------- ln yi + -------------------------- ln yi
ln ( xj ⁄ xi ) ln ( xj ⁄ xi )
x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2
x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated
7. Tabular values on an axis if XAXIS or YAXIS = LOG must be positive. A fatal message
will be issued if an axis has a tabular value < 0.
Main Index
384
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM2 TID X1
x1 yI x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
Example:
TABLEM2 15 -10.5
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1 Table parameter. (Real)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points
or two end points. For example, in Figure 4-13, discontinuities are allowed only
between points x2 through x7. Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the
average value of y is used. In Figure 4-13, the value of y at x = x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields
following the last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry
containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLEM2 uses the algorithm
y = zy T ( x – X1 )
where x is input to the table, y is returned and z is supplied from the MATi entry. The
table look-up is performed using linear interpolation within the table and linear
extrapolation outside the table using the two starting or end points. See Figure 4-13.
No warning messages are issued if table data is input incorrectly.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 385
Bulk Data Entries
x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2
x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated
Main Index
386
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM3 TID X1 X2
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1, X2 Table parameters. See Remark 6. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Tabular values for xi must be specified in either ascending or descending order, but not
both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points
or two end points. For example, in Figure 4-14 discontinuities are allowed only
between points x2 through x7. Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the
average value of y is used. In Figure 4-14, the value of y at x = x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields
following the last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry
containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLEM3 uses the algorithm
y = zy T -----------------
x – X1
X2
where x is input to the table, y is returned and z is supplied from the MATi entry. The
table look-up is performed using linear interpolation within the table and linear
extrapolation outside the table using the two starting or end points. See Figure 4-14.
No warning messages are issued if table data is input incorrectly.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 387
Bulk Data Entries
x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2
x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated
Main Index
388
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM4 TID X1 X2 X3 X4
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 -etc.-
Example:
Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
Xi Table parameters. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0; X3 < X4)
Ai Coefficients. (Real)
Remarks:
1. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
2. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in the field following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the
end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
3. TABLEM4 uses the algorithm
N
x – X1 i
y = z ∑ Ai -----------------
X2
i = 0
where x is input to the table, y is returned and z is supplied from the MATi entry.
Whenever x < X3, use X3 for x; whenever x > X4, use X4 for x. There are N + 1 entries
in the table. There are no error returns from this table look-up procedure.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 389
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEMP SID G1 T1 G2 T2 G3 T3
Example:
Field Contents
SID Temperature set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ti Temperature. (Real)
Remarks:
1. In the static solution sequences, the temperature set ID(SID) is selected by the Case
Control command TEMP. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced
in the TID field of an LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control
command LOADSET. There is a maximum of 66 unique temperature SIDs that may be
specified.
2. Set ID must be unique with respect to all other LOAD type entries if TEMP(LOAD) is
specified in the Case Control Section.
3. From one to three grid point temperatures may be defined on a single entry.
4. If thermal effects are requested, all elements must have a temperature field defined
either directly on a TEMPP1, TEMPP3, or TEMPRB entry or indirectly as the average of
the connected grid point temperatures defined on the TEMP or TEMPD entries.
Directly defined element temperatures always take precedence over the average of grid
point temperatures.
5. If the element material is temperature dependent, its properties are evaluated at the
average temperature.
6. Average element temperatures are obtained as a simple average of the connecting grid
point temperatures when no element temperature data are defined. Gauss point
temperatures are averaged for solid elements instead of grid point temperature.
7. For steady state heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMPD entry
supplies the initialization temperatures for nonlinear analysis. The Case Control
command TEMP(INIT) = SID requests selection of this entry. The temperature values
specified here must be coincident with any temperature boundary conditions that are
specified.
Main Index
390
8. For transient heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMPD entry supplies
the initial condition temperatures. The Case Control command IC = SID requests
selections of this entry. The temperature values specified here must be coincident with
any temperature boundary condition specified.
9. In linear and nonlinear buckling analysis, the follower force effects due to loads from
this entry are not included in the differential stiffness. See “Buckling Analysis in
SubDMAP MODERS” on page 468 and “Nonlinear Static Analysis” on page 650 of
the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 391
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEMPAX SID1 RID1 PHI1 T1 SID2 RID2 PHI2 T2
Example:
Field Contents
SIDi Temperature set identification number. (Integer > 0)
RIDi Ring identification number (see RINGAX entry). (Integer > 0)
PHIi Azimuthal angle in degrees. (Real)
Ti Temperature. (Real)
Remarks:
1. TEMPAX is allowed only if an AXIC entry is also present.
2. SIDi must be unique with respect to all other LOAD type entries if TEMP(LOAD) is
specified in the Case Control Section.
3. Temperature sets must be selected with the Case Control command TEMP=SID. There
is a maximum of 66 unique temperature SIDs that may be specified.
4. One or two temperatures may be defined on each entry.
5. For a discussion of the conical shell problem, see “Restart Procedures” on page 398 of
the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
6. TEMP(INIT) is not used with this entry.
Main Index
392
Defines a temperature value for all grid points of the structural model that have not been given
a temperature on a TEMP entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEMPD SID1 T1 SID2 T2 SID3 T3 SID4 T4
Example:
TEMPD 1 216.3
Field Contents
SIDi Temperature set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ti Default temperature value. (Real)
Remarks:
1. For structural analysis in the static solution sequences, the temperature set ID (SID) is
selected by the Case Control command TEMP. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID
must be referenced in the TID field of an LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected
by the Case Control command LOADSET. There is a maximum of 66 unique
temperature SIDs that may be specified.
2. SIDi must be unique with respect to all other LOAD type entries if TEMP(LOAD) is
specified in the Case Control Section.
3. From one to four default temperatures may be defined on a single entry.
4. If thermal effects are requested, all elements must have a temperature field defined
either directly on a TEMPP1, TEMPP3, or TEMPRB entry or indirectly as the average of
the connected grid point temperatures defined on the TEMP or TEMPD entries.
Directly defined element temperatures always take precedence over the average of grid
point temperatures.
5. If the element material is temperature dependent, its properties are evaluated at the
average temperature.
6. Average element temperatures are obtained as a simple average of the connecting grid
point temperatures when no element temperature data is defined.
7. For steady-state heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMP entry
supplies the initialization temperatures for nonlinear analysis. The Case Control
command TEMP(INIT) = SID requests selection of this entry. The temperature values
specified here must be coincident with any temperatures boundary conditions that are
specified.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 393
Bulk Data Entries
8. For transient heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMP entry supplies
the initial condition temperatures. The Case Control command IC=SID request
selection of this entry. The temperature values specified here must be coincident with
any temperature boundary conditions that are specified.
9. In linear and nonlinear buckling analysis, the follower force effects due to loads from
this entry are not included in the differential stiffness. See “Buckling Analysis in
SubDMAP MODERS” on page 468 and “Nonlinear Static Analysis” on page 650 of
the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual.
10. For partitioned Bulk Data superelements and auxiliary models, TEMPD must be
specified in all partitioned Bulk Data Sections.
Main Index
394
2 2
( B0 + B1 ⋅ p + B2 ⋅ p )u d + ∑ ( A0 ( i ) + A1 ( i )p + A2 ( i )p ) ui = 0 Eq. 4-3
i
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TF SID GD CD B0 B1 B2
Example:
Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GD, G(i) Grid, scalar, or extra point identification numbers. (Integer > 0)
CD, C(i) Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar or extra points, any
B0, B1, B2 one of the Integers 1 through 6 for a grid point.)
A0(i), A1(i), A2(i) Transfer function coefficients. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Transfer function sets must be selected with the Case Control command TFL = SID.
2. Continuation entries are optional.
3. The matrix elements defined by this entry are added to the dynamic matrices for the
problem.
4. The constraint relation given in Eq. 4-3 will hold only if no structural elements or other
matrix elements are connected to the dependent coordinate u d . In fact, the terms on
the left side of Eq. 4-3 are simply added to the terms from all other sources in the row
for u d .
5. See the MSC.Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide for a discussion of transfer
functions.
6. For each SID, only one logical entry is allowed for each GD, CD combination.
7. For heat transfer analysis, the initial conditions must satisfy Eq. 4-3.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 395
Bulk Data Entries
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TLOAD1 SID EXCITEI DELAY TYPE TID
D
Example:
TLOAD1 5 7 LOAD 13
Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID Identification number of DAREA or SPCD entry set or a thermal load set (in heat
transfer analysis) that defines A. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer > 0)
DELAY Defines time delay τ . (Integer > 0, real or blank) If it is a non-zero integer, it
represents the identification number of DELAY Bulk Data entry that defines τ . If
it is real, then it directly defines the value of τ that will be used for all degrees of
freedom that are excited by this dynamic load entry. See also Remark 9.
TYPE Defines the type of the dynamic excitation. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer,
character or blank; Default = 0)
TID Identification number of TABLEDi entry that gives F ( t ) . (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Dynamic excitation sets must be selected with the Case Control command DLOAD =
SID.
2. The type of the dynamic excitation is specified by TYPE (field 5) according to the
following table:
3. TYPE (field 5) also determines the manner in which EXCITEID (field 3) is used by the
program as described below
Excitation specified by TYPE is applied load
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID may also reference DAREA, static, and thermal load set entries
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program may also reference static and thermal load set entries specified by
the LID or TID field in the selected LSEQ entries corresponding to the
EXCITEID.
Excitation specified by TYPE is enforced motion
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID will reference SPCD entries. If such entries indicate null enforced
motion, the program will then assume that the excitation is enforced motion
using large mass and will reference DAREA and static and thermal load set
entries just as in the case of applied load excitation.
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program will reference SPCD entries specified by the LID field in the
selected LSEQ entries corresponding to the EXCITEID. If such entries indicate
null enforced motion, the program will then assume that the excitation is
enforced motion using large mass and will reference static and thermal load set
entries corresponding to the DAREA entry in the selected LSEQ entries, just as
in the case of applied load excitation.
4. EXCITEID may reference sets containing QHBDY, QBDYi, QVECT, QVOL and
TEMPBC entries when using the heat transfer option.
5. TLOAD1 loads may be combined with TLOAD2 loads only by specification on a
DLOAD entry. That is, the SID on a TLOAD1 entry may not be the same as that on a
TLOAD2 entry.
6. SID must be unique for all TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, and ACSRCE
entries.
7. If the heat transfer option is used, the referenced QVECT entry may also contain
references to functions of time, and therefore A may be a function of time.
8. If TLOADi entries are selected in SOL 111 or 146 then a Fourier analysis is used to
transform the time-dependent loads on the TLOADi entries to the frequency domain
and then combine them with loads from RLOADi entries. Then the analysis is
performed as a frequency response analysis but the solution and the output are
converted to and printed in the time domain. Please refer to “Fourier Transform” on
page 176 of the MSC.Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.
9. If DELAY is blank or zero, τ will be zero.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 397
Bulk Data Entries
0 , t < ( T1 + τ ) or t > ( T2 + τ )
{P(t)} =
A t̃ B e C t̃ cos ( 2πF t̃ + P ) , ( T1 + τ ) ≤ t ≤ ( T2 + τ )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TLOAD2 SID EXCITEID DELAY TYPE T1 T2 F P
C B
Example:
2.0
Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID Identification number of DAREA or SPCD entry set or a thermal load set (in heat
transfer analysis) that defines A. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer > 0)
DELAY Defines time delay τ. (Integer > 0, real or blank). If it is a non-zero integer, it
represents the identification number of DELAY Bulk Data entry that defines τ.. If
it is real, then it directly defines the value of τ that will be used for all degrees of
freedom that are excited by this dynamic load entry. See also Remark 5.
TYPE Defines the type of the dynamic excitation. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer,
character or blank; Default = 0)
T1 Time constant. (Real > 0.0)
T2 Time constant. (Real; T2 > T1)
F Frequency in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
P Phase angle in degrees. (Real; Default = 0.0)
C Exponential coefficient. (Real; Default = 0.0)
B Growth coefficient. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Dynamic excitation sets must be selected with the Case Control command with
DLOAD=SID.
Main Index
398
2. The type of the dynamic excitation is specified by TYPE (field 5) according to the
following table:
3. TYPE (field 5) also determines the manner in which EXCITEID (field 3) is used by the
program as described below
Excitation specified by TYPE is applied load
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID may also reference DAREA, static and thermal load set entries
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program may also reference static and thermal load set entries specified by
the LID or TID field in the selected LSEQ entries corresponding to the
EXCITEID.
Excitation specified by TYPE is enforced motion
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID will reference SPCD entries. If such entries indicate null enforced
motion, the program will then assume that the excitation is enforced motion
using large mass and will reference DAREA and static and thermal load set
entries just as in the case of applied load excitation.
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program will reference SPCD entries specified by the LID field in the
selected LSEQ entries corresponding to the EXCITEID. If such entries indicate
null enforced motion, the program will then assume that the excitation is
enforced motion using large mass and will reference static and thermal load set
entries specified by the LID or TID field in the selected LSEQ entries
corresponding to the EXCITEID, just as in the case of applied load excitation.
4. EXCITEID (field 3) may reference sets containing QHBDY, QBDYi, QVECT, and QVOL
and TEMPBC entries when using the heat transfer option.
5. If DELAY is blank or zero, τ will be zero.
6. TLOAD1 loads may be combined with TLOAD2 loads only by specification on a
DLOAD entry. That is, the SID on a TLOAD1 entry may not be the same as that on a
TLOAD2 entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 399
Bulk Data Entries
7. SID must be unique for all TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, and ACSRCE
entries.
8. If the heat transfer option is used, the referenced QVECT entry may also contain
references to functions of time, and therefore A may be a function of time.
9. If TLOADi entries are selected in SOL 111 or 146 then a Fourier analysis is used to
transform the time-dependent loads on the TLOADi entries to the frequency domain
and them combine them with loads from RLOADi entries. Then the analysis is
performed as a frequency response analysis but the solution and the output are
converted to and printed in the time domain. In this case, B will be rounded to the
nearest integer. Please refer to “Fourier Transform” on page 176 of the MSC.Nastran
Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.
10. The continuation entry is optional.
Main Index
400
Defines parametric controls and data for nonlinear transient structural or heat transfer analysis.
TSTEPNL is intended for SOLs 129, 159, and 99.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TSTEPNL ID NDT DT NO KSTEP MAXITER CONV
Example:
Field Contents
ID Identification number. (Integer > 0)
NDT Number of time steps of value DT. See Remark 2. (Integer > 4)
DT Time increment. See Remark 2. (Real > 0.0)
NO Time step interval for output. Every NO-th step will be saved for output. See
Remark 3. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
KSTEP KSTEP is the number of converged bisection solutions between stiffness updates.
(Integer > 0; Default = 2)
MAXITER Limit on number of iterations for each time step. See Remark 4. (Integer ≠ 0;
Default = 10)
CONV Flags to select convergence criteria. See Remark 5. (Character: “U”, “P”, “W”, or
any combination; Default = “PW.”)
EPSU Error tolerance for displacement (U) criterion. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-2)
EPSP Error tolerance for load (P) criterion. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-3)
EPSW Error tolerance for work (W) criterion. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-6)
MAXDIV Limit on the number of diverging conditions for a time step before the solution is
assumed to diverge. See Remark 6. (Integer > 0; Default = 2)
MAXQN Maximum number of quasi-Newton correction vectors to be saved on the
database. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0; Default = 10)
MAXLS Maximum number of line searches allowed per iteration. See Remark 7. (Integer
> 0; Default = 2)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 401
Bulk Data Entries
Field Contents
FSTRESS Fraction of effective stress ( σ ) used to limit the subincrement size in the material
routines. See Remark 8. (0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.2)
MAXBIS Maximum number of bisections allowed for each time step. See Remark 9. (-9
<Integer < 9; Default = 5)
ADJUST Time step skip factor for automatic time step adjustment. See Remark 10. (Integer
> 0; Default = 5)
MSTEP Number of steps to obtain the dominant period response. See Remark 11. (10 <
Integer < 200; Default = variable between 20 and 40.)
RB Define bounds for maintaining the same time step for the stepping function during
the adaptive process. See Remark 11. (0.1 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.75)
MAXR Maximum ratio for the adjusted incremental time relative to DT allowed for time
step adjustment. See Remark 12. (1.0 < Real < 32.0; Default = 16.0)
UTOL Tolerance on displacement or temperature increment below which a special
provision is made for numerical stability. See Remark 13. (0.001 < Real < 1.0;
Default = 0.1)
RTOLB Maximum value of incremental rotation (in degrees) allowed per iteration to
activate bisection. See Remark 14. (Real > 2.0; Default = 20.0)
Remarks:
1. The TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry is selected by the Case Control command TSTEP = ID.
Each residual structure subcase requires a TSTEP entry and either applied loads via
TLOADi data or initial values from a previous subcase. Multiple subcases are assumed
to occur sequentially in time with the initial values of time and displacement conditions
of each subcase defined by the end conditions of the previous subcase.
2. NDT is used to define the total duration for analysis, which is NDT * DT. Since DT is
adjusted during the analysis , the actual number of time steps, in general, will not be
equal to NDT). Also, DT is used only as an initial value for the time increment.
3. For printing and plotting the solution, data recovery is performed at time steps 0, NO,
2 * NO, ..., and the last converged step. The Case Control command OTIME may also
be used to control the output times.
4. The number of iterations for a time step is limited to MAXITER. If MAXITER is
negative, the analysis is terminated when the divergence condition is encountered
twice during the same time step or the solution diverges for five consecutive time steps.
If MAXITER is positive, the program computes the best solution and continues the
analysis until divergence occurs again. If the solution does not converge in MAXITER
iterations, the process is treated as a divergent process. See Remark 6.
Main Index
402
5. The convergence test flags (U = displacement error test, P = load equilibrium error test,
W = work error test) and the error tolerances (EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW) define the
convergence criteria. All requested criteria (combination of U, P, and/or W) are
satisfied upon convergence. Note that at least two iterations are necessary to check the
displacement convergence criterion.
6. MAXDIV provides control over diverging solutions. Depending on the rate of
divergence, the number of diverging solutions (NDIV) is incremented by 1 or 2. The
solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV reaches MAXDIV during the iteration. If
the bisection option is used (allowed MAXBIS times) the time step is bisected upon
divergence. Otherwise, the solution for the time step is repeated with a new stiffness
based on the converged state at the beginning of the time step. If NDIV reaches
MAXDIV again within the same time step, the analysis is terminated.
7. Nonzero values of MAXQN and MAXLS will activate the quasi-Newton update and
the line search process, respectively.
8. The number of subincrements in the material routines is determined such that the
subincrement size is approximately FSTRESS ⋅ σ . FSTRESS is also used to establish a
tolerance for error correction in elastoplastic material, i.e.,
Main Index
CHAPTER D 403
Bulk Data Entries
11. MSTEP and RB are used to adjust the time increment during analysis. The
recommended value of MSTEP for nearly linear problems is 20. A larger value (e.g.,
40) is required for highly nonlinear problems. By default, the program automatically
computes the value of MSTEP based on the changes in the stiffness.
The time increment adjustment is based on the number of time steps desired to capture
the dominant frequency response accurately. The time increment is adjusted as
follows:
∆t n + 1 = f ( r )∆t n
where
r = ------------------- ------ --------
1 2π 1
MSTEP ω n ∆t n
with
f = 0.25 for r < 0.5 ⋅ RB
f = 0.5 for 0.5 ⋅ RB ≤ r < RB
f = 1.0 for RB ≤ r < 2.0
f = 2.0 for 2.0 ≤ r < 3.0 ⁄ RB
f = 4.0 for r ≥ 3.0 ⁄ RB
12. MAXR is used to define the upper and lower bounds for adjusted time step size, i.e.,
Main Index
404
Defines radiation cavity and shadowing for radiation view factor calculations.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VIEW IVIEW ICAVITY SHADE NB NG DISLIN
Example:
Field Contents
IVIEW Identification number. (Integer > 0)
ICAVITY Cavity identification number for grouping the radiant exchange faces of CHBDYi
elements. (Integer > 0)
SHADE Shadowing flag for the face of CHBDYi element. (Character, Default = “BOTH”)
NONE means the face can neither shade nor be shaded by other faces.
KSHD means the face can shade other faces.
KBSHD means the face can be shaded by other faces.
BOTH means the face can both shade and be shaded by other faces. (Default)
NB Subelement mesh size in the beta direction. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
NG Subelement mesh size in the gamma direction. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
DISLIN The displacement of a surface perpendicular to the surface. See Figure 4-15. (Real;
Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. VIEW must be referenced by CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP elements to be used.
2. ICAVITY references the cavity to which the face of the CHBDYi element belongs; a
zero or blank value indicates this face does not participate in a cavity.
3. NB, NG, and DISLIN are used in the calculation of view factors by finite difference or
contour integration techniques. They are not used with the VIEW3D entry.
4. A summary of the shadowing conditions can be requested by the PARAM,MESH,YES
Bulk Data entry.
5. SHADE references shadowing for CHBDYi elements participating in a radiation cavity,
the VIEW calculation can involve shadowing.
6. DISLIN should only be used with LINE type CHBDYE and CHBDYP surface elements.
DISLIN > 0.0 means into the cavity. See Figure 4-15.
Main Index
CHAPTER D 405
Bulk Data Entries
DISLIN
Active Side
Location of Element
7. NB and NG define the subelement mesh refinement when using the VIEW module (as
opposed to the VIEW3D module) for the calculation of view factors.
n
3 2
4 1
Figure 4-16 Typical AREA4 surface element where NB=2 and NG=4
Main Index
406
Defines parameters to control and/or request the Gaussian Integration method of view factor
calculation for a specified cavity.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VIEW3D ICAVITY GITB GIPS CIER ETOL ZTOL WTOL RADCHK
Example:
VIEW3D 1 2 2 4 1.0E-6
Field Contents
ICAVITY Radiant cavity identification number on RADCAV entry. (Integer > 0)
GITB Gaussian integration order to be implemented in calculating net effective view
factors in the presence of third-body shadowing. (Integer 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 10; Default
= 4)
GIPS Gaussian integration order to be implemented in calculating net effective view
factors in the presence of self-shadowing. (Integer 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 10; Default = 4)
CIER Discretization level used in the semi-analytic contour integration method. (1 <
Integer < 20; Default = 4)
ETOL Error estimate above which a corrected view factor is calculated using the
semi-analytic contour integration method. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.1)
ZTOL Assumed level of calculation below which the numbers are considered to be zero.
(Real > 0.0; Default = 1.E-10)
WTOL Assumed degree of warpage above which the actual value of F ii will be calculated.
(0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.01)
Main Index
CHAPTER D 407
Bulk Data Entries
Field Contents
RADCHK Type of diagnostic output desired for the radiation exchange surfaces. (Integer;
Default = 3)
RADCHK = -1, No diagnostic output requested
RADCHK = 1, Grid table and element connectivity
RADCHK = 2, Surface Diagnostics - Surface type, area, skewness, taper, warpage,
grid point sequencing, aspect ratio, and shading flags.
RADCHK = 3, Area, view factor, area-view factor product with error estimate,
existence flags for partial self-shadowing, third-body shadowing with error
estimate, and enclosure summations for view factor. (Default)
RADCHK = 0, Same as RADCHK = 1, 2, and 3
RADCHK = 12, Same as RADCHK = 1 and 2
RADCHK = 13, Same as RADCHK = 1 and 3
RADCHK = 23, Same as RADCHK = 2 and 3
Remarks:
1. For ETOL, when the error estimate exceeds the value input for the ETOL entry, the
contour method is employed to develop an improved view factor.
2. For ZTOL, the use of a geometry scale that results in small numerical values of A i F ij
should be avoided.
3. When WTOL is exceeded, the actual value of F ii will be calculated when using the
adaptive view module. Warpage will not be considered in the calculation of F ij .
4. For axisymmetric analysis, RADCHK = -1 or 3 only.
Main Index
408
$ Comment
Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere within
the input file.
Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.
Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE
Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
View Factor Calculation Methods
E
■ Calculation of View Factors
■ Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation
Main Index
410
Main Index
CHAPTER E 411
View Factor Calculation Methods
n̂
n̂
n̂
n̂ n̂ n̂
Main Index
412
Z
J
3
r 13
K nK
2
r 12 L
nL
X I
6. The CHBDYi element types available for radiation view factor calculation include:
POINT
LINE
REV
AREA3
AREA4
AREA6–VIEW3D Module Only
AREA8–VIEW3D Module Only
All surface elements may be used for radiation enclosure analysis if the appropriate
user supplied view or exchange factors are available.
7. MSC.Nastran allows for isolated surface element groupings when performing view
factor calculations – multiple radiation cavities. This procedure can eliminate a great
deal of needless calculation among surfaces when one group of elements clearly cannot
see another group of elements. The surface element groups therefore are arranged by
unique cavity IDs. No surface element may reside in more than on cavity.
8. The VIEW entry invokes the calculation of the view factors for the overall thermal
analysis. It also separates the CHBDYi surface elements into the desired cavities. The
IVIEW field identifies the CHBDYi elements and the ICAVITY field assigns the
elements to a cavity.
Main Index
CHAPTER E 413
View Factor Calculation Methods
1 cos β i cos β j
F ij = ----- ∫∫ -------------------------------
- dA i dA j
Ai 2
A A πr ij
i j (dimensionless) Eq. 5-1
where F ij is defined as the fraction of the radiant emission leaving surface i which arrives at
surface j.
Cj
z vj Aj
dA j
r βj
y
r
nj
ni
vi
βi
x Ai
dA i
Ci
2. The VIEW Module solves Eq. 5-1 by two methods. The first method discretizes the
surface elements into a number of finite subelements and treats the integrals as dual
summations over all the subelements on surfaces I and J. This method is often referred
to as the finite difference method, but is just an extension of view factor algebra.
Consider the surfaces I and II below with subdivision 1 → 8 .
Main Index
414
3 8
4 7
2 5
1 6
I II
c. Now, f II – I = f II – 1 + f II – 2 + f II – 3 + f II – 4
d. and, A II f II – I = A 1 f 1 – II + A 2 f 2 – II + A 3 f 3 – II + A 4 f f – II
e. using, a. then A II F II – I = A 1 ( f 1 – 5 + f 1 – 6 + f 1 – 7 + f 1 – 8 )
+ A2 ( f2 – 5 + f2 – 6 + f2 – 7 + f2 – 8 )
+ A2 ( f3 – 5 + f3 – 6 + f3 – 7 + f3 – 8)
+ A4 ( f4 – 5 + f4 – 6 + f4 – 7 + f4 – 8)
4 8
1 cos β i cos β j A i A j
f. so f I – II = -----
AI ∑ ∑ ------------------------------------------
ΠR ij
2
i = 1j = 5
The second method transforms the area integrals into contour integrals and subdivides
the perimeter into finite line segments. A similar dual contour summation is then
performed around surfaces I and J. This method is commonly referred to as the contour
integration method.
3. In general, area integration is faster than contour integration, but does not provide as
accurate an answer. Several choices can be made by the user as a result. The RADCAV
entry has information fields on it for the control and manipulation of the view factor
calculation:
NFECI = FD Finite Difference methods are used to calculate the view factors (applies
to the VIEW Module only).
NFECI = CONT Contour integration methods are used to calculate the view factors
(applies to the VIEW Module only).
Main Index
CHAPTER E 415
View Factor Calculation Methods
NFECI = blank or 0. This is the default value signifying that the code will make an
estimate based on geometry and the field value of RMAX as to whether it will use finite
differences or contour integration. Figure 5-4 below illustrates the criteria enforced.
d ij
i j
Figure 5-4
Aj
-------------- > RMAX
2
( d ij )
1. Since the VIEW Module relies on element subdivision in its calculation method, a
means of requesting the level of subdivision is made available. The number of element
subdivisions are specified on the NB and NG field of the VIEW entry. The subdivision
process is illustrated below for the various surface element types.
AREA4
Y G3
G4
G1
G2 X
NB = 3
NG = 4
Main Index
416
POINT
G1
NB = 2
NG = 4
LINE
G1 G2
NB = 4
NG = 3
REV
G2
NB = 2
NG = 4
G1
Y
X
AREA3
G3
NB = 7
NG = 3
G1 G2
Main Index
CHAPTER E 417
View Factor Calculation Methods
In this equation, F ij is the initially calculated view factor (always an integration order
of 2 by 2) and RMAX and RMIN represent the largest and smallest integration point
(surface I) to integration point (surface J) vector lengths. Surface proximity and
orientation are reflected in this value.
6. When a large number of surfaces are involved in an enclosure (1000+), it may be
advisable to reduce the values of the field data for GITB, GIPS, and CIER to the value
of (2).
7. Because view factors solely involve geometry, it is important to work in
dimensions/units that do not lead to machine accuracy problems. In particular, in
transformed space, the view factor equation has an integration point to integration
point distance raised to the fourth power in the denominator.
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Radiation Enclosures
F
■ Method of Poljak
■ Method of Poljak - Radiation Exchange in Matrix Format
■ Transformation from Element Heat Flows to Grid Point Heat Flows
■ Example of Element/Grid Transformation
■ Two Element Example for Radiant Exchange
■ Resistive Network Approach to the Two Surface Problem
■ Radiation Enclosure Analysis
Main Index
420
Aj fj – k = Ak fk – j Eq. 6-2
N
q i, k = ∑ f k – j q o, j Eq. 6-3
j = 1
4
q o, k = ε k σT k + ( 1 – ε k )q i, k Eq. 6-4
N
4
q i, k = ∑ f k – j ( ε k σT k + ( 1 – ε k )q i, k ) Eq. 6-5
j = 1
N N
4
q i, k = ∑ f k – j ε k σT k + ∑ f k – j ( 1 – ε k )q i, k Eq. 6-6
j = 1 j = 1
N N
4
q i, k 1 – ∑ f k – j ( 1 – ε k ) = ∑ f k – j ε k σT k Eq. 6-7
j = 1 j = 1
–1
N N
q i, k = ∑ 1 – ∑ f k – j ( 1 – ε k )
4
f k – j ε k σT k Eq. 6-8
j = 1 j = 1
where:
A = elemental areas
f = basic view factors
N = number of element in enclosure
q i, k = heat flux into surface element k
Nε T
qk = q i, k – q o, k Eq. 6-9
Main Index
CHAPTER F 421
Radiation Enclosures
or
Nε T
Qk = A k ( q i, k – q o, k ) Eq. 6-10
Main Index
422
OUT 4 IN
{ q }e = σ [ ε ]{ ue } + [ I – ε ] { q }e (compare to Eq. 6-4) Eq. 6-12
where:
OUT = radiosity
{ q }e
σ = Stephan-Boltzmann constant
= diagonal matrix of surface emissivities
\
ε
\
= diagonal matrix of surface absorptivities
\
α
\
IN –1 4
{ q }e = σ[(A – F(I – α)) Fε ] { u } e Eq. 6-13
OUT –1 4
{ q }e = σ[ε + (I – α)(A – F(I – α )) Fε ] { u } e
IN OUT 4
{ Q }e = [ A ] ( { q }e – { q }e ) ≡ –[ Re ] { u }e Eq. 6-14
–1
[ R e ] = σ [ Aε – Aα ( A – F ( I – α ) ) Fε ] Eq. 6-15
Main Index
CHAPTER F 423
Radiation Enclosures
T
{ Q }g = [ G ] { Q }e Eq. 6-16
where:
T = matrix of constant coefficients constructed from the fraction of the element area
[G]
associated with the connecting grid points.
then:
4 4
{ u }e = [ G ] { ug + Ta } Eq. 6-17
and
T
[ R ]g = [ G ] [ R ]e [ G ] Eq. 6-18
[ R ]g if [ R ] e Eq. 6-19
SYM SYM
4
{ Q }e = –σ [ R ]e [ G ] { ug + Ta } Eq. 6-20
4
{ Q }g = – σ [ R ]g { u g + Ta } Eq. 6-21
Main Index
424
G4 G7
G2
1 G6
G8
G1 2
G5
R 11 R 12
[ R ]e = Eq. 6-22
R 21 R 22
4
Q1 R 11 R 12 u 1
= –σ Eq. 6-23
Q2 R 21 R 22 u 4
e e 2 e
Q
1
Q AF1 0
2
Q AF2 0
3
AF3 0
Q4 AF4 0 Q1
= Eq. 6-24
Q5 0 AF5 Q2
0 AF6 e
Q6
0 AF7
Q7
0 AF8
Q8
g
Where AFi ( i = 1, 8 ) is the fractional area of the element associated with grid point Gi.
T
[ R ]g = [ G ] [ R ]e [ G ] Eq. 6-26
Main Index
CHAPTER F 425
Radiation Enclosures
AF1 0
AF2 0
AF3 0
AF4 0 R 11 R 12 AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 0 0 0 0
[ R ]g = Eq. 6-27
0 AF5 R 21 R 22 0 0 0 0 AF5 AF6 AF7 AF8
e
0 AF6
0 AF7
0 AF8
Main Index
426
A1 2
1
D
A2
–1
[ R ] e = σ [ Aε – Aα ( A – F ( I – α ) ) Fε ] Eq. 6-29
–1
–1 A1 0 0 A 1 f 12 1 – ε1 0
( A – F( I – α ) ) = –
0 A2 A 2 f 21 0 0 1 – ε2
Eq. 6-31
–1
A1 – A 1 f 12 ( 1 – ε 2 )
=
– A 2 f 21 ( 1 – ε 1 ) A2
For ease of illustration (and manipulation) let surfaces 1 and 2 be black bodies, then
ε 1 = ε 2 = 1.0
then
1
------ 0
–1 A1
( A – F( I – α ) ) = Eq. 6-32
1
0 ------
A2
1
------ 0
A1 0 A1 0 A1 0 A 1 f 12
[ R ]e = σ – Eq. 6-33
0 A2 0 A2 1 A 2 f 21 0
0 ------
A2
A1 – A 1 f 12
[ R ]e = σ Eq. 6-34
– A 2 f 21 A2
Main Index
CHAPTER F 427
Radiation Enclosures
4
A1 – A 1 F 12 u1
{ Q }e = –σ 4 Eq. 6-35
– A 2 F 21 A2
e u2
e
To further define a specific problem, let A 1 = A 2 = D = 1.0, T 1 = 1000 and T 2 = 0.0 . For this
geometry then, f 12 = f 21 ≅ .20 . The resulting heat flows are:
4 4
Q 1 = – σ ( 1000 – .2 ( 0 ) ) = – σ ( 1000 )
Eq. 6-36
4 4
Q 2 = – σ ( – .2 ( 0 ) – .2 ( 1000 ) ) = .2σ ( 1000 )
Note: Since the exchange matrix [ R ] is not conservative, we recognize that the MSC.Nastran
e
default condition assumes a third exchange surface representing a loss to space.
Therefore, the loss to space is:
Q 1 + Q 2 + Q 3 = 0.0
4
Eq. 6-37
Q 3 = .8σ ( 1000 )
Main Index
428
4 4
σ ( T1 – T2 )
Q 1 – 2 = -------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 6-38
1 – ε1 1 1 – ε2
--------------- + -------------- + ---------------
ε1 A1 A 1 f 12 ε2 A2
Using the same example problem considered in the exchange matrix development,
ε 1 = ε 2 = 1.0
A 1 = A 2 = 1.0
f 12 = .20
4 4
Q 1 – 2 = σA 1 f 12 ( T 1 – T 2 ) = – Q 2 – 1
Eq. 6-39
4
= .2σ ( 1000 )
in a matrix format,
4
A 1 f 12 – A 1 f 12 u 1
{ Q }e = –σ Eq. 6-40
– A 1 f 12 A 1 f 12 u 4
2
Main Index
CHAPTER F 429
Radiation Enclosures
4
{ Q }n = [ R ]n { u + T a } Eq. 6-41
where:
{ Q } n = Vector of net elemental heat flows from radiant exchange for cavity n
\
α
\
RADMTX “SCRIPT-F”
[ R ] = –σ * “SCRIPT-F” ( Off Diagonal Terms)
MTXTYP = 2 – Symmetric
– Conservative
RADLST
MTXTYP = 3 – Unsymmetric
– Conservative
Main Index
CHAPTER F 431
Radiation Enclosures
In this instance CONSERVATIVE means that the diagonal terms of [ R ] are adjusted to make the
column summations equal to 0.0. Since all the radiation matrix values are user supplied, no
control over the system can be effected by the view factor module. A user warning message is
issued if Eq. 6-42 is satisfied.
where:
Main Index
432
Main Index
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Radiation Exchange – Real Surface
G Approximation
Main Index
434
Main Index
CHAPTER G 435
Radiation Exchange – Real Surface Approximation
*From Siegel and Howell, Thermal Radiation Heat Transfer, Second Edition.
{ fe } =
FRAC 0 – λ U – FRAC 0 – λ U
2 e 1 e
f e = Fraction of the total radiant output of a black body that is contained in the n-
th wavelength band where ∆λ = λ 2 – λ 1 .
U e = Elemental temperatures
FRAC 0 – λU = 15 e – mν
e ------
π
4 ∑ ------------ { [ ( mν + 3 )mν + 6 ] mν + 6 }, ν ≥ 2
m4
m = 1, 2, …
Main Index
436
FRAC 0 – λU = 2 4 6 8
e 15 3 1 ν ν ν ν ν
1 – ------ ν --- – --- + ------ – ------------ + ------------------ – ------------------------ , ν < 2
3 8 60 5040 272160 13305600
4
π
ν =
25898 µm R ( TYP )
o
PLANCK2
---------------------------- , where PLANCK2 =
λU e
14388 µm K
o
=σ [ Aε ( λ ) – Aα ( λ ) ( A – F ( I – α ( λ ) ) ) – 1 Fε ( λ ) ]
n
[ R eλ ] n
=
\
{ Q eλ } n λ 4
–[ Re ] n fe { Ue }
\
= λ net 4
net –[ Re ] { Ue }
{ Q eλ }
where,
n max
\
NET λ
[ R eλ ] = ∑ [ Re ]n fe
n = 1 \ n
Main Index
CHAPTER G 437
Radiation Exchange – Real Surface Approximation
ε( λ)
.90
.40
∞
0 λ1 λ2 λ
ε( λ)
.90
∞
0 λ1 λ2 λ
ε(λ)
.90
.40
0 λ1 λ2
Main Index
438
Main Index
439
I N D E X
MSC.Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
I N D E X
MSC.Nastran
Thermal
Analysis User’s Symbols CBEAM 7, 277
CBEND 7, 277
Guide
$ 38 CDAMP1 Bulk Data entry
$ Bulk Data entry specification of 281
specification of 279, 408 CDAMP2 Bulk Data entry
specification of 282
CDAMP3 Bulk Data entry
A specification of 283
Absolute temperature 21 CDAMP4 Bulk Data entry
Absorptivity 138, 204, 228, 429 specification of 284
Ambient element 148, 150 CDAMP5 Bulk Data entry
Ambient nodes 88 specification of 285
Ambient temperature 166, 228 CDAMPi 8
ANALYSIS 61, 70 CELAS1 Bulk Data entry
Axisymmetric elements 127 specification of 286
Axisymmetric modeling 127 CELAS2 Bulk Data entry
Axisymmetric surface elements 127 specification of 287
CELAS3 Bulk Data entry
specification of 288
B CELAS4 Bulk Data entry
Band-energy approximation 434 specification of 289
BDYOR 277, 278 CELASi 8, 29, 193
BDYOR Bulk Data entry CEND 35
specification of 280 CEND Executive Control statement
BEGIN BULK 35, 38 specification of 231
BFGS 66 CHBDY 88, 100, 105, 111, 204
Bisection of loads 60 CHBDYE 8, 17, 19, 127, 277, 278
Blackbody 138 CHBDYE Bulk Data entry
Boundary conditions 16, 88 specification of 290
CONV 16 CHBDYG 8, 15, 24, 26, 127, 144, 277, 278
CONVM 16 AREA3 8
RADBC 16 AREA4 8
RADSET 16 AREA6 8
Bulk Data 277, 278 AREA8 8
Bulk Data entries 38, 276 REV 8
CHBDYG Bulk Data entry
specification of 293 Index
C CHBDYi 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 142, 193, 200, 204,
Case Control 13, 19, 84, 114, 166, 167, 172, 412
185, 277
Case Control commands 35
Case Control Section 12
CBAR 7, 277
Main Index
440 INDEX
Main Index
442 INDEX
N PBEND 277
pch 39, 40
NASPLT 40 PCONV 17, 18, 90, 91, 278
NASTRAN definition(s) 35 PCONV Bulk Data entry
NDAMP 187, 214 specification of 338
Newton's method 59 PCONVM 278
NLPARM 35, 36, 60, 62, 64, 66, 85, 92, 277 PCONVM Bulk Data entry
NLPARM Bulk Data entry specification of 340
specification of 323 PDAMP Bulk Data entry
NOLIN 210 specification of 342
NOLIN1 13, 277 PDAMP5 Bulk Data entry
NOLIN1 Bulk Data entry specification of 343
specification of 329 PELAS Bulk Data entry
NOLIN2 13, 277 specification of 344
NOLIN2 Bulk Data entry Phase change 185, 187
specification of 331 PHBDY 277, 278
NOLIN3 14, 210, 277 PHBDY Bulk Data entry
NOLIN3 Bulk Data entry specification of 345
specification of 333 Planck's second constant 25, 228
NOLIN4 14, 277 Plotting 41
NOLIN4 Bulk Data entry TEKPLT 41
specification of 335 X-Y plotting 47
NONLINEAR 13, 277 plt 40
Nu 215 Pr 214
Numerical damping 185, 187, 214 Prandtl's number 20, 88, 228
Nusselt's number 88, 228 PROD 277
PSHELL 277
PSOLID 277
O PTUBE 277
operation commands 47 Punch file 147, 150, 152, 155, 157
Output requests
ENTHALPY 37
FLUX 36, 37 Q
HDOT 37 QBDY1 13, 68, 277
OLOAD 36, 37 QBDY1 Bulk Data entry
SORT1 37 specification of 347
SORT2 37 QBDY2 13, 68, 277
SPCF 36, 37 QBDY2 Bulk Data entry
THERMAL 36, 37 specification of 348
QBDY3 13, 68, 277
QBDY3 Bulk Data entry
P specification of 349
PARAM Bulk Data entry QBDYi 35
specification of 337 QHBDY 13, 35, 68, 277
PARAM,POST 40 QHBDY Bulk Data entry
Index PARAM,SIGMA 429 specification of 350
PARAM,TABS 429 Quasi-Newton 60
Parameter 21 Quasi-Newton (BFGS) updates 60
SIGMA 21 QVECT 11, 13, 15, 22, 35, 68, 133, 138, 200,
TABS 21 277
PBAR 277 QVECT Bulk Data entry
PBEAM 277 specification of 352
Main Index
INDEX 443
QVOL 13, 35, 68, 111, 114, 172, 174, 277 Restart
QVOL Bul Data entry LOOPID 36
specification of 355 SUBID 36
Restarts 37
LOOPID 37
R SLOOPID 37
RADBC 11, 16, 21, 278 STIME 37
RADBC Bulk Data entry Reynolds' number 20, 228
specification of 356
RADBND 25, 138, 140, 277, 278, 436
RADBND Bulk Data entry S
specification of 357 SCR 39
RADCAV 25, 26, 142, 148, 153, 278, 418 SCR (scratch) command 39
Radiation 278 Self-shadowing 411
Radiation ambient element 148 SET1 Bulk Data entry
Radiation boundary condition 105, 106, 130, specification of 366
133, 200, 278 Shadowing 142, 144
Radiation cavities 153, 412 SID 172
Radiation cavity/enclosure 142 SIGMA 21, 23, 26, 108
Radiation exchange 142 SLOAD 13, 193, 277
Radiation exchange with space 16 SLOAD Bulk Data entry
Radiation exchange within an enclosure 16 specification of 367
Radiation matrix 430 SOL 153 35
Radiation to space 21, 130 SOL 159 36
RADLST 22, 23, 24, 278 SOL Executive Control statement
RADLST Bulk Data entry specification of 238
specification of 360 Solar flux 200
RADLST/RADMTX 22, 25, 142, 430 Solar load 130, 138
RADLST/RADMTX punch files 148 SPC 28, 64, 85, 163, 166, 193, 277, 278
RADM 10, 15, 21, 22, 24, 25, 133, 138, 142, SPC Bulk Data entry
277, 278 specification of 368
RADM Bulk Data entry SPC1 277
specification of 362 SPC1 Bulk Data entry
RADM/RADBND 21 specification of 369
RADM/RADMT 21 SPCADD Bulk Data entry
RADM/RADMT/RADBND 23, 25, 26 specification of 370
RADMT 10, 15, 25, 277, 278 SPCD 277
RADMT Bulk Data entry SPCD Bulk Data entry
specification of 363 specification of 371
RADMTX 23, 24, 278 SPCs 85
RADMTX Bulk Data entry Specific heat 10, 88, 158, 228
specification of 364 Spectral emissivity 434
RADSET 11, 16, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 142, 153, Spectral radiation 138
278 Spectral radiation exchange 25
RADSET Bulk Data entry SPOINT 176, 277
specification of 365 SPOINT Bulk Data entry Index
RADVAC Bulk Data entry specification of 373
specification of 358 Steady State 15
Re 214
Reference enthalpy 10
Residual vector 59
Main Index
444 INDEX